Sāsanapaṭṭhānavāra解释
276 段
《教法发趣品》注释:即对《教法发趣品》的解释。显示巴利原文
Sāsanapaṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanā
如是以种种方式分析了理趣的生起之后,现在,为分析教法发趣,因为于“摄品”等中,仅以根本句摄集发趣而未具体显示其形态,故为说明“既应从根本句确定发趣,也应由发趣确定根本句”,便说:“十八根本句应于何处见?应于教法发趣中见。”根本句与教法发趣的相互摄集,前文已示。那么,“教法发趣”一词语义为何?教法的发趣,即教法发趣。教法即教导,为了随顺所化者的意乐、成就他们的利益与安乐,而以种种方式安立、开展此教导,这便是教法发趣。然于此处,为显示其如是存在的状态,故称为“教法发趣”。又或,教法指增上戒学等。由于它们是修行的所依,故作为依止而安立他们的事物——即杂染等法,称为发趣。由于开示这些发趣,故依邻近之喻而称诸经为发趣;又由于这些经的集合,故此论典的部分名为发趣。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbathā nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ vibhajitvā idāni sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ vibhajanto yasmā saṅgahavārādīsu mūlapadeheva paṭṭhānaṃ saṅgahetvā sarūpato na dassitaṃ, tasmā yathā mūlapadehi paṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ, evaṃ paṭṭhānatopi mūlapadāni niddhāretabbānīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbā? Sāsanapaṭṭhāne’’ti āha. Mūlapadasāsanapaṭṭhānānañhi aññamaññasaṅgaho pubbe dassito evāti. Atha sāsanapaṭṭhānanti ko vacanattho? Sāsanassa paṭṭhānanti sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ , sāsanaṃ desanā, tassā veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanatthaṃ pakārehi ṭhānaṃ pavatti sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ. Idha pana tassa tathābhāvadīpanaṃ ‘‘sāsanapaṭṭhāna’’nti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā sāsanaṃ adhisīlasikkhādayo. Tesaṃ pavattanupāyabhāvato patiṭṭhahanti etehīti paṭṭhānāni, saṃkilesādidhammā. Tesaṃ pavedanato tadupacārena suttāni paṭṭhānāni. Tesaṃ pana samūhabhāvato ayaṃ pakaraṇappadeso paṭṭhānaṃ nāma.
复次,以何义而名发趣?以“已出发”之义,即“行走”之义。如经云“他们从牛棚已出发之牛”(《中部》1.156),依此发趣而称为“从牛棚已出发之牛”,其义即为行走。同理,在理趣未广开的摄理中,无所执着的教说智慧之运行,当于杂染分、世间分等类别,以及此二者混合的类别中,获得广开理趣时,他们杂染分等法、世间分等法,无论各别或混合,皆以无执着的方式运行,故以因由而名为发趣。由开显这些发趣故,应知此论典的部分为发趣。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – kenaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ? Paṭṭhitaṭṭhena gamanaṭṭhenāti attho. ‘‘Ye te goṭṭhā paṭṭhitagāvo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.156) āgataṭṭhānasmiñhi yena paṭṭhānena te ‘‘goṭṭhā paṭṭhitagāvo’’ti vuttā, taṃ atthato gamanaṃ hoti. Iti nātivitthāritanayesu hāranayesu anissaṅgagamanassa desanāñāṇassa saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyādibhedesu tadubhayavomissakabhedesu ca vitthāritanayalābhato nissaṅgavasena pavattagamanattā te saṃkilesabhāgiyādayo lokiyādayo ca visuṃ visuṃ vomissā ca adhikaraṇavasena paṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tesaṃ pakāsanato ayaṃ pakaraṇappadeso paṭṭhānanti veditabbaṃ.
在“杂染分”等中:以此而杂染,故为杂染。在杂染的部分、杂染的类别中所行的,为杂染分。习行即福德修习,在习行的部分中所行的,为习行分;或令亲近习行,故为习行分。摧破即对贪蕴等的破灭,为决择。在决择的部分中所行的,或令亲近决择,故为决择分。圆满学法的无学者,在无学的状态中所行的,或令亲近无学,故为无学分。其中,凡开示渴爱等杂染者,此为杂染分。凡开示布施等福行事者,此为习行分。凡开示有学戒蕴等者,此为决择分。凡开示无学戒蕴等者,此为无学分。其余诸经,则以他们混合之理趣而说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṃkilesabhāgiya’’ntiādīsu saṃkilissati etenāti saṃkileso. Saṃkilesabhāge saṃkilesakoṭṭhāse pavattaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ. Vāsanā puññabhāvanā, vāsanābhāge pavattaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, vāsanaṃ bhajāpetīti vā vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Nibbijjhanaṃ lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ padālanaṃ nibbedho. Nibbedhabhāge pavattaṃ, nibbedhaṃ bhajāpetīti vā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Pariniṭṭhitasikkhādhammā asekkhā, asekkhabhāve pavattaṃ, asekkhe bhajāpetīti vā asekkhabhāgiyaṃ. Tesu yattha taṇhādisaṃkileso vibhatto, idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ. Yattha dānādipuññakiriyavatthu vibhattaṃ, idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Yattha sekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo vibhattā, idaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Yattha pana asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo vibhattā, idaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ. Itarāni tesaṃ vomissakanayavasena vuttāni.
然而,这些类别共有六对二法、四组三法、一个四法及另一个四法,合为十二种。其中,四对二法及二组三法已被列出,其余则未被列出。未列出者并无特别缘由。依此理趣,亦可掌握其余,故应视为于圣典中略说。正如随后将说:“此四种经,若作共通,则成八种”等。其中,由于某经唯开示渴爱杂染,某经唯开示邪见杂染,某经唯开示恶行杂染,故将杂染分经依此三种而列出:“渴爱杂染分经”等。同样地,所谓清净,乃于有杂染时方显,故清净分经亦随杂染的分别,唯以三种列出:“渴爱清净分经”等。然而,他们于义理上即是习行分等。此一理趣,在某些抄本中未见记载。显示巴利原文
Tāni pana cha dukā cattāro tikā ekaṃ catukkaṃ aparampi ekaṃ catukkanti dvādasa honti. Tesu cattāro dukā dve ca tikā uddhaṭā, itare na uddhaṭā, anuddharaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthi. Iminā nayena tepi gahetuṃ sakkāti pāḷiyaṃ saṃkhittāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati – ‘‘imāni cattāri suttāni, sādhāraṇāni katāni aṭṭha bhavantī’’tiādi. Tattha yasmā katthaci sutte taṇhāsaṃkilesova niddisīyati, katthaci diṭṭhisaṃkilesova, katthaci duccaritasaṃkilesova niddisīyati, tasmā saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tidhā vibhajitvā uddiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādinā. Tathā vodānaṃ nāma saṃkilese sati hotīti vodānabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesavibhāgena tidhāva uddiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘taṇhāvodānabhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādinā. Taṃ pana atthato vāsanābhāgiyādi eva hoti. Ayañca nayo kesuci potthakesu natthi.
“其中,杂染有三种”等,为显示习行分等经的所缘而开演,以从杂染的对立面确定止观等方式切入。其中,“若于诸有生起执著”,即对不能舍断诸有中欲贪者,若生起对有的希求。“如是”,即对此补特伽罗而言,此依止观修习所成的福行事,因能招感应供养之有的果报而存续。“导致生于彼处”,即导至投生于彼彼诸有之中。“此四种经”,即此杂染分等四种经。“作共通”,谓以杂染分与习行分、杂染分与决择分、杂染分与无学分、习行分与决择分,如此结合不同章句而混合。“成为八种”,即前四种与此四种,如是成为八种。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha saṃkileso tividho’’tiādi saṃkilesapaṭipakkhato samathādiniddhāraṇavasena vāsanābhāgiyādisuttānaṃ visayadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha yadi āsatti uppajjati bhavesūti bhavesu chandarāgaṃ pajahituṃ asakkontassa yadi bhavapatthanā uppajjati. Evaṃ sāyanti evamassa puggalassa ayaṃ samathavipassanābhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu bhavati pujjabhavaphalanibbattanato. Tatrūpapattiyā saṃvattatīti tatra tatra bhave upapattiyā saṃvattati. Imāni cattāri suttānīti imāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādīni cattāri suttāni. Sādhāraṇāni katānīti saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca, vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcāti evaṃ padantarasaṃyojanavasena missitāni katāni. Aṭṭha bhavantīti purimāni cattāri imāni cattārīti evaṃ aṭṭha bhavanti.
正是这八种经,通过共通组合而成为十六种。即:将前述八种经,分别与习行分、无学分、决择分组合;无学分与杂染分、习行分组合;决择分与杂染分、习行分组合;无学分与杂染分、决择分组合;无学分与习行分、决择分组合;无学分与杂染分、习行分、决择分组合;决择分与无学分,以及非杂染分、非习行分、非决择分、非无学分组合。如此作成共通组合后,前八种与此八种,合为十六种。其中,应知有四个单法、六对二法、四组三法、一个四法及另一个四法,这些分类亦应了知。而且,应知其中有两对二法、两组三法、两个四法,为圣典中未曾提及。显示巴利原文
Tāniyeva aṭṭha suttāni sādhāraṇāni katāni soḷasa bhavantīti tāniyeva yathāvuttāni aṭṭha suttāni vāsanābhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, nibbedhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca nevasaṃkilesabhāgiyañca, navāsanābhāgiyañca nanibbedhabhāgiyañca na asekkhabhāgiyañcāti evaṃ sādhāraṇāni katāni purimāni aṭṭha imāni aṭṭhāti soḷasa bhavanti. Tesu cattāro ekakā, cha dukā, cattāro tikā, eko catukko, aparopi eko catukkoti ayampi vibhāgo veditabbo. Tatthāpi dve dukā, dve tikā, dve catukkā ca pāḷiyaṃ anāgatāti veditabbā.
现在,为了阐明此《发趣》摄尽一切教法的事实,而说:“以此十六种经分别时,九分教之经即被分别。”其意为:依《发趣》的理趣,以此杂染分等十六种经分别时,所谓“经、应颂”等九分教——也就是结集教法之经——便被分别、解析为十六种。也就是说,没有哪一部分结集教法不被这十六种发趣所摄。那么,如何判定是杂染分等呢?答:“由一偈类推另一偈”等。其中,“由一偈类推另一偈”的意思是:如同此偈是杂染分,另一偈也应被类推为杂染分,或为串习分,或为抉择分,或为无学分,应随顺推度、思量而了知。其余文句,义理亦同。在此,应知除了偈颂与记说之外的一切教法,都被“经”一词所摄括。显示巴利原文
Idāni imassa paṭṭhānassa sakalasāsanasaṅgahitabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘imehi soḷasahi suttehi bhinnehi navavidhaṃ suttaṃ bhinnaṃ bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – imehi saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi soḷasahi suttehi paṭṭhānanayena vibhattehi suttageyyādinavavidhaṃ pariyattisāsanasaṅkhātaṃ suttaṃ bhinnaṃ soḷasadhā vibhattaṃ hoti. Iminā soḷasavidhena paṭṭhānena asaṅgahito pariyattisāsanassa padeso natthīti adhippāyo. Kathaṃ pana saṃkilesabhāgiyādibhāvo gahetabboti? Āha ‘‘gāthāya gāthā anuminitabbā’’tiādi. Tattha gāthāya gāthā anuminitabbāti ayaṃ gāthā viya gāthā saṃkilesabhāgiyāti vā vāsanābhāgiyāti vā nibbedhabhāgiyāti vā asekkhabhāgiyāti vā anuminitabbā, anu anu minitvā takketvā jānitabbāti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca gāthāveyyākaraṇavinimuttā sabbā pariyatti ‘‘suttenā’’tipadena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā.
现在,为了以实例阐明前述的杂染分等经,开始解说“其中,什么是杂染分经”等。其中,“为欲所盲、为网所覆……”一偈的含义,前面已经解说过。如同对此偈,从此以后,对前面已经释义之处及文句浅显之处,我们不再解释其义。显示巴利原文
Idāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādīni suttāni yathāniddiṭṭhāni udāharaṇavasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāmandhā jālasañchannā’’ti gāthāya attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Yathā imassa, evaṃ ito parānampi heṭṭhā vuttatthānaṃ uttānapadānañca atthaṃ na vaṇṇayissāma.
“非行处之行”:指以身等行不应行之处,即造作不应造作之事。“由欲”:因欲、以欲求为缘。“行非行处”:行于不应行之处,即作不应作之事。“法”:善士、圣者之法。“超越”:逾越而违犯。“退堕”:衰损。“声誉”:称誉与随从。显示巴利原文
Agatigamanānīti kāyādīhi ayuttagamanāni, akattabbakaraṇānīti attho. Chandāti chandahetu icchāpaccayā. Agatiṃ gacchatīti agantabbaṃ gatiṃ gacchati, akattabbaṃ karotīti attho. Dhammanti sādhūnaṃ ariyānaṃ dhammaṃ. Ativattatīti atimadditvā vītikkamati. Nihīyatīti hāyati. Yasoti kitti ca parivāro ca.
在“诸法意先行”一偈中,“意”:虽总指欲界善等所有四地之心,但在此处,依眼长老前世为医时生起之心,特限定为与嗔恚相应之心。“意先行”:意为这些法的先行者,即具有以意为首导的含义。“法”:依无有情、无命我之义而称为法,即受等三种无色蕴。因为这些蕴确实是意先行的。然而,在同一事、同一所缘、同一刹那中生起的意,如何能成为与它们同时的“先行者”呢?从生起缘的意义上说。譬如,众人一起作劫村等恶行时,若问“谁是他们的先行者?”,那个作为他们条件、他们依之而造业的人,不论是给予者还是朋友,便被称为他们的先行者。同样,此处的理趣也应如此看待。因此,从生起缘的意义上说,意为这些法的先行者,故称“意先行”。因为若意不生起,这些受等便不能生起;而意,即使在某些心所不生起时,也能生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti gāthāyaṃ manoti yadipi kāmāvacarakusalādibhedaṃ sabbampi catubhūmakacittaṃ mano, imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne cakkhupālattherassa (dha. pa. 1-2; theragā. 95) purimajātiyaṃ vejjabhūtassa uppannavasena niyamiyamānaṃ paṭighasampayuttacittameva labbhati. So mano pubbaṅgamo etesanti manopubbaṅgamā, manasā paṭhamagāminā samannāgatāti attho. Dhammāti nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena dhammā, te pana vedanādayo tayo arūpino khandhā. Ete hi manopubbaṅgamā. Kathaṃ panetehi saddhiṃ ekasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ ekasmiñca ārammaṇe ekakkhaṇe uppajjamāno mano pubbaṅgamo nāma hotīti? Uppādapaccayaṭṭhena. Yathā hi bahūsu ekato gāmaghātādikammāni karontesu ‘‘ko etesaṃ pubbaṅgamo’’ti vutte yo tesaṃ paccayo hoti, yaṃ yaṃ nissāya te taṃ kammaṃ karonti, so datto vā mitto vā tesaṃ pubbaṅgamoti vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iti uppādapaccayaṭṭhena mano pubbaṅgamo etesanti manopubbaṅgamā. Na hi te mane anuppajjante uppajjituṃ sakkuṇanti, mano pana ekaccesu cetasikesu anuppajjantesupi uppajjati eva.
以增上义故,意为这些法中的最上者,故名“意最上”。正如盗贼之中,贼首等为增上者、最上者,同样,意也是这些法中的最上者。又如木等所成之物称为木制品等,同样,这些法亦因由意所成而名为“意所成”。“以污染心”:即被贪欲等过失所污染、所毁坏的心,或说或做。因为当他说时,只会说四种语恶行;当他做时,只会做三种身恶行;即使不说不做,也因以贪欲等污染心而成就三种意恶行。如此,他的十不善业道便得圆满。由此,“苦追随他”:即由此三种恶行,苦追随此人,以恶行之力在四恶趣中追随于他。如同什么?“如车轮随运者之足”:正如拉车的公牛,车轮紧随其足迹转动,同样,苦亦如此追随此人。显示巴利原文
Adhipativasena mano seṭṭho etesanti manoseṭṭhā. Yathā hi corādīnaṃ corajeṭṭhakādayo adhipatino seṭṭhā, tathā tesampi mano seṭṭho. Yathā pana dāruādīhi nipphannāni bhaṇḍāni dārumayādīni nāma honti, tathā etepi manato nipphannattā manomayā nāma. Paduṭṭhenāti abhijjhādīhi dosehi paduṭṭhena dūsitena bhāsati vā karoti vā. So hi bhāsanto catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritameva bhāsati, karontopi tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritameva karoti, abhāsanto akaronto tehi abhijjhādīhi paduṭṭhamanatāya tividhaṃ manoduccaritaṃ pūreti. Evamassa dasa akusalakammapathā pāripūriṃ gacchanti. Tato naṃ dukkhamanvetīti tato tividhaduccaritato taṃ puggalaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti duccaritānubhāvena catūsu apāyesu dukkhaṃ anugacchati. Yathā kiṃ? Cakkaṃva vahato padanti, yathā nāma sakaṭaṃ vahato balībaddassa padaṃ paharantaṃ cakkaṃ anugacchati, evaṃ naṃ puggalaṃ dukkhamanugacchatīti.
在“Middhī yadā hoti”(当人昏沉时)这一偈中,“middhī”指被昏沉与睡眠(thinamiddha)所征服的人。“mahagghaso”指食量极大的人,正如那些边吃边抓、衣服沾满食物、在鸟群间觅食、食乌鸦所弃残食、食已即呕者之中的任何一种。“niddāyitā”指嗜睡成性的人。“samparivattasāyī”指追求卧床之乐与侧卧之乐,不断辗转反侧而眠的人。“nivāpapuṭṭho”指被米糠等猪食所喂养者。因为家猪自幼便被喂养,当身体肥大时,无力离家外出,只能蜷伏在床下等处,喘着气躺在那里。此处所表达的是:若一个人既昏沉又大量进食,便如那被饵食喂养的大猪一般,无法以其他威仪度日,嗜睡成性,老是躺下并辗转反侧,那么他就无法作意无常、苦、无我这三相。由于不作意这三相,他便成为智慧迟钝之人,一次又一次入胎,无从母胎中解脱。显示巴利原文
‘‘Middhī yadā hotī’’ti gāthāyaṃ middhīti thinamiddhābhibhūto. Mahagghasoti mahābhojano āharahatthakaalaṃsāṭakatatravaṭṭakakākamāsakabhuttavamitakānaṃ aññataro viya. Niddāyitāti supanasīlo. Samparivattasāyīti seyyasukhapassasukhānaṃ anuyuñjanavasena samparivattakasayanasīlo . Nivāpapuṭṭhoti kuṇḍakādinā sūkarabhattena puṭṭho. Gharasūkaro hi bālakālato paṭṭhāya posiyamāno thūlasarīrakāle gehato bahi nikkhamituṃ alabhanto heṭṭhāmañcādīsu samparivattitvā samparivattitvā assasanto passasanto sayateva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadā puriso middhī ca hoti mahagghaso ca, nivāpapuṭṭho mahāvarāho viya aññena iriyāpathena yāpetuṃ asakkonto niddāsīlo saṃparivattasāyī, tadā so ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti tīṇi lakkhaṇāni manasi kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tesaṃ amanasikārā mandapañño punappunaṃ gabbhaṃ upeti, gabbhavāsato na parimuccatīti.
在“Ayasāva malaṃ”(犹如铁锈)这一偈中,“ayasā”指从铁中。“samuṭṭhitaṃ”指所生起的锈。“tatuṭṭhāya”指从该处生起之后,却又反噬该处。“atidhonacārin”——“dhonā”是指这样的智慧:受用四资具时,先省察“以此资具维生,有此已足,我唯取适量”,然后再行受用。若超越此智而行,便名为“atidhonacārī”。这里所要表达的是:恰如铁锈从铁自身生起,从哪处生起,便返回腐烂、摧毁那铁本身;同样地,那些不省察而受用四资具、超越此智而行的人,其自业从自身的相续中现行,这些自业便会将自己带至悲惨之处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayasāva mala’’nti gāthāyaṃ ayasāti ayato. Samuṭṭhitanti jātaṃ. Tatuṭṭhāyāti tato uṭṭhahitvā. Atidhonacārinanti dhonā vuccati cattāro paccaye idamatthitāya alametenāti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanapaññā, taṃ atikkamitvā caranto atidhonacārī nāma. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ayato malaṃ samuṭṭhāya yato taṃ samuṭṭhitaṃ, tameva khādati vināseti, evamevaṃ cattāro paccaye appaccavekkhitvā paribhuñjantaṃ atidhonacārinaṃ sāni kammāni attano santāne uṭṭhitattā attano santakāneva tāni kammāni duggatiṃ nayantīti.
在“Coro yathā”(如盗贼)这一偈中,“盗贼在破墙处被捉”(coro yathā sandhimukhe gahīto),即如盗贼切断屋墙缺口,正要入屋时,恰在那墙洞处便被国王的差役捉住。“他因自业被击打、遭捆绑”(sakammunā haññati bajjhate ca),即由于他自己所造的业,遭受鞭笞等击打,以及戴上镣铐等捆绑。同理,“此世作恶之人,死后在他世”(evaṃ ayaṃ pecca pajā parattha)也是如此:于现世造恶之人,死后到了他世,“因自业被击打、遭捆绑”(sakammunā haññati bajjhate ca),即由于他自己所造的恶业,在地狱等处,以种种方式被狱卒等击打与束缚。显示巴利原文
‘‘Coro yathā’’ti gāthāyaṃ coro yathā sandhimukhe gahītoti yathā coro gharasandhiṃ chinditvā gehaṃ pavisanto gharasandhimukhe eva rājapurisehi gahito. Sakammunā haññati bajjhate cāti tena attanā katakammena kasābhitāḷanādinā haññati ceva addubandhanādinā bajjhati ca. Evaṃ ayaṃ pecca pajā paratthāti evampi ayaṃ pāpakārinī pajā ito cavitvā paraloke. Sakammunā haññati bajjhate cāti attanāva katena pāpakammena nirayādīsu nānappakārehi kammakāraṇādīhi haññati ceva paribajjhati cāti.
于‘Sukhakāmāni’(希求乐者)一偈中,“以杖伤害者”(yo daṇḍena vihiṃsati)指任何人用杖或土块等去伤害他人。“死后他不得乐”(pecca so na labhe sukhaṃ):此人于来世既得不到人间之乐,也得不到天界之乐,至于涅槃之乐,则更无谈论的余地。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sukhakāmānī’’ti gāthāyaṃ yo daṇḍena vihiṃsatīti yo puggalo daṇḍena vā leḍḍuādīhi vā vibādhati. Pecca so na labhe sukhanti so puggalo paraloke manussasukhaṃ vā dibbasukhaṃ vā na labhati, nibbānasukhe pana vattabbameva natthi.
“牛群正渡河时”:指母牛们正在渡越大河之时。“如果领头牛走了弯路”:如果牛群的首领——那头公牛,偏离了直道而行。“所有牛便都跟着走弯路”:亦即所有的母牛也都一齐走上弯路。何以如此?“因为向导走上了弯路”:是说当引领者走上了弯路,正由于引领者行走在弯路上。当知,这头领头公牛是它们的依怙,也是为它们除险避难者。显示巴利原文
Gunnaṃce taramānānanti gāvīsu mahoghaṃ tarantīsu. Jimhaṃ gacchati puṅgavoti yadi yūthapati usabho kuṭilaṃ gacchati. Sabbā tā jimhaṃ gacchantīti sabbāpi tā gāviyo kuṭilameva gacchanti. Kasmā? Nette jimhaṃ gate satīti nettari kuṭilaṃ gate sati, nettassa kuṭilaṃ gatattāti attho. So hi tāsaṃ paccayiko upaddavaharo ca.
于“同样地”这一偈中:正如这个道理一般,若在人群中被认为是至尊至上的那人,却行于非法,那么依他而活的所有人,便也都成为非法者。因为资具的丰足,会助长其与生俱来的习性。也正因如此,若国王是非法者,整个国土便陷于苦难。“实在是极为困苦啊”:意思是陷于极大的苦难之中。“依著于诸蕴”:即对五欲之蕴等生命要素生起爱著。“染著”:即被贪欲所制伏。“为苦”:即是苦。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evameva’’nti gāthāyaṃ yathā cetaṃ, evamevaṃ yo manussesu padhānasammato, yadi so adhammacārī siyā. Ye tassa anujīvino, sabbepi adhammikāva honti. Sāmisampadā hi pakatisampadaṃ sampādeti. Yasmā ca etadeva, tasmā sabbaṃ raṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ seti, rājā ce hoti adhammiko. Sukiccharūpā vatāti suṭṭhu kicchāpannarūpā vata. Upadhīsūti kāmaguṇūpadhīsu. Rattāti rāgābhibhūtā. Kaṭukanti dukkhaṃ.
由于悔恨,衣钵等资具的来源断绝了。正如芭蕉结出果实后便自身毁灭,所以说“果实的确杀害了芭蕉”;同样地,因为结果即意味着生命的终结,对于这些草本植物,也有“果实杀害竹,果实杀害芦”的说法。若母马怀了驴种,所生便称为驴骡。此驴骡怀胎后,临产时却无法自行娩出,唯有蹄子刨地,痛苦地站立。此时人们便将其四腿绑在四根桩上,剖开其腹取出小骡,母骡则当场死去,因此说“犹如胎儿杀害母骡”。这是说:正如芭蕉、竹、芦苇被自身的果实所毁,胎儿也会害死母骡一样,作为自己业报显现的恭敬与利养,同样能毁掉非善人。显示巴利原文
Kukkuccajanakeneva pattavaṭṭippabhavassa upacchinnattā phaluppatti kadaliyā parābhavāya hotīti āha – ‘‘phalaṃ ve kadaliṃ hantī’’ti. Tathā phalapariyosānattā osadhīnaṃ ‘‘phalaṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ naḷa’’nti vuttaṃ. Vaḷavāya kucchismiṃ gadrabhassa jātā assatarī nāma, sā gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā kāle sampatte vijāyituṃ na sakkoti. Pādehi bhūmiṃ paharantī tiṭṭhati, athassa cattāro pāde catūsu khāṇukesu bandhitvā kucchiṃ phāletvā potakaṃ nīharanti, sā tattheva marati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘gabbho assatariṃ yathā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā attano phalaṃ kadaliveḷunaḷepi vināseti, gabbho ca assatariṃ, evaṃ attano kammaphalabhūto sakkāro asappurisaṃ vināsetīti.
「敬重忿与覆者」:即是将具愤怒相的“忿”和具覆藏他人功德相的“覆”推崇备至,高举而行。「如在良田」:即使在肥沃的良田中。「犹如腐烂的种子」:好比已经败坏的种子。意思是,由于没有经过诸如粪汁等充分浸沤、晾干、妥善安放等处理,种子本身便有了缺陷,成了败坏的坏种子。显示巴利原文
Kodhamakkhagarūti kujjhanalakkhaṇaṃ kodhaṃ, paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇaṃ makkhañca garuṃ katvā uddhaṃ katvā ukkhipitvā caranto. Sukhetteti sukhettepi. Pūtibījaṃvāti pūtibhāvaṃ gataṃ bījaṃ viya. Chakaṇarasādiparibhāvanasukkhāpanasukhasayādīni akaraṇena bījadosaduṭṭhanti attho.
“Cetasā”(以心):即用自己的心。“Ceto”(心):指那补特伽罗的心。“Pariccā”(限定):作了限定之后。“Iriyati”(转起):指他那样转起、活动。“Yathābhatam”:如同随手取来放置的状态。显示巴利原文
Cetasāti attano cittena. Cetoti tassa puggalassa cittaṃ. Pariccāti paricchinditvā. Iriyatīti pavattati. Yathābhatanti yathā kiñci āharitvā ṭhapitaṃ.
“Mākattha”(莫作):你们不要作。“Na pamutyatthi”(没有解脱):即没有解脱。“Upeccāpi”(即便故意地):即便是故意为之,亦即事先用心谋划,就是这个意思。显示巴利原文
Mākatthāti mā akattha. Na pamutyatthīti pamokkho natthi. Upeccāpīti sañciccāpi, buddhipubbenāpīti attho.
在说了“以不如法”之后,又说“以妄语”,这是为了显示妄语的大罪过性。因此,佛陀才说:“凡是超越了这一法的人……”(《法句经》第176偈),并且说:“罗睺罗,对于那些在故意妄语时都不感到惭愧的人,他们的沙门性实在太过渺小了”等等(《中部》2.108)。“那怎么会这样呢”:那份财富对他们来说,将以什么方式存在?因为他们是以不如法的手段积聚的,所以那份财富在他们那里不会长久存在,这就是它的意思。“将会有障碍”:由于不如法的交易等,将会有来自国王等方面的障碍。“su”只是一个小品词。“所积聚的会灭去”:这样积聚的、预备的东西会灭去。“Sagga”指善趣。因为善趣凭借色等美妙的事物而被视为最上,故名为“天”。至此,宣说了现世利益和来世利益的损毁。“破坏了”即毁坏了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Adhammenā’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘musāvādenā’’ti vacanaṃ musāvādassa mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘ekaṃ dhammaṃ atītassā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 176), tathā ‘‘evaṃ parittaṃ kho, rāhula, tesaṃ sāmaññaṃ, yesaṃ natthi sampajānamusāvāde lajjā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.108). Taṃ kathaṃ nu bhavissatīti taṃ dhanaṃ kena nu pakārena tesaṃ bhavissati. Adhammena tesaṃ sambhatattā tesu naciraṭṭhitikaṃ hotīti attho. Antarāyā su bhavissantīti adhammiyavohārādito rājantarāyādayo bhavissanti. Sūti nipātamattaṃ. Sambhatassa vinassatīti imassa sambhataṃ sajjitaṃ vinassati. Sagganti sugatiṃ. Sā hi rūpādīhi sobhanehi aggoti saggoti adhippetā. Ettāvatāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikānaṃ atthānaṃ hāniyā. Hatāti vinaṭṭhā.
“退转”即退堕。“因贪欲而挖掘自己”是说:以贪欲为因造作不善业,以身体行恶等方式,他是在挖掘自己。“丧失于朋友”是指从朋友的状态中退失了。显示巴利原文
Vivaṭṭateti nivaṭṭati. Lobhā khaṇati attānanti lobhahetu apuññāni karonto kāyavisamādiyogena attānaṃ khaṇati nāma. Mittehi jīratīti mittabhāvehi hāyati.
“他们游走”指他们以四种威仪,只造不善而四处游走。“愚者”指不知此世利益与他世利益之人,此处称为愚者。“劣慧者”指无慧者。因为所谓“慧的败坏”其实并不存在。“犹如怨敌”指变得像怨敌、像仇敌一样。“苦果”指果报锐利,即苦果之意。“那样的业并不好,做了会懊悔”:那种能在诸地狱等处产生痛苦、带来苦果的业,做了之后,每当忆起便会懊悔、忧伤;那样的业,做了并不好、不美,并非善行。“他泪流满面”指那人泪水盈面,哭泣着领受、品尝着异熟。显示巴利原文
Carantīti catūhi iriyāpathehi akusalameva karontā vicaranti. Bālāti idhalokatthaṃ paralokatthañca ajānantā idha bālā nāma. Dummedhāti nippaññā. Na hi paññāya duṭṭhattaṃ nāma atthi. Amittenevāti amittabhūtena viya verinā viya hutvā. Kaṭukapphalanti tikhiṇaphalaṃ, dukkhaphalanti attho. Na taṃ kammaṃ kataṃ sādhu, yaṃ katvā anutappatīti yaṃ kammaṃ nirayādīsu nibbattanasamatthaṃ dukkhudayaṃ katvā anussaritānussaritakkhaṇe anutappati anusocati, taṃ kataṃ na sādhu na sundaraṃ na bhaddakaṃ. Yassa assumukhoti yassa assūhi tintamukho rodanto vipākaṃ paṭisevati anubhoti.
“难作”指:因为要履行种种义务等,增上戒律无法做到,故称难作。“难忍”指:从受持开始便不令其破损,尤其须令最初梵行维持直至临终之心,故说难忍;或者说,由于戒律防护等若未周密守护便无法圆满成就,故为难作;又因所应忍耐的事物难以承担,故从忍辱防护的角度说为难忍。“愚钝者”指智慧迟钝的人。“沙门性”即沙门法。“于此”指于那沙门性中。“拥挤”指衣着不整的女人等所造成的拥挤。“在那里”指在那些成为戒律防护障碍的拥挤等不相称的所缘之处。或者,为了显示“难作”一词的含义,而说“难忍”。“难忍”即难以忍受、难以承担。“愚者”指愚钝之人。“沙门性”指沙门法。这是说:那些有智慧、是善男子的沙门,即使十年、二十年乃至六十年,以齿扣齿,舌抵上颚,以心抑心,奉行一座食、一餐食,终生不渝地行持梵行,而愚者、钝慧者却做不到。“于此,愚者遭遇众多困难”指在那出家的沙门法中,愚者经历着诸多困难。显示巴利原文
Dukkaranti vattapaṭivattapūraṇādivasena ābhisamācārikasīlassa kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya dukkaraṃ. Samādānato paṭṭhāya khaṇḍaṃ akatvā visesato ādibrahmacariyakassa carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya duttitikkhaṃ, sīlasaṃvarādayo vā aparikkhate katvā sampādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya dukkaraṃ. Adhivāsetabbānaṃ pana dussahanato khantisaṃvaraṃvasena duttitikkhaṃ. Abyattenāti mandapaññena. Sāmaññanti samaṇabhāvo. Tatthāti tassa sāmaññassa. Sambādhāti dunnivatthaduppārutamātugāmādisammaddā. Yatthāti sīlasaṃvarādīnaṃ paribandhabhūtesu sambādhasaṅkhātesu visabhāgārammaṇādīsu . Atha vā dukkarantipadassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ duttitikkhanti vuttaṃ. Duttitikkhanti dukkhamaṃ duradhivāsiyaṃ. Abyattenāti bālena. Sāmaññanti samaṇadhammo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ paṇḍitā kulaputtā dasapi vassāni vīsatipi…pe… saṭṭhipi vassāni dantebhi dantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṃ āhacca cetasā cittaṃ abhiniggaṇhitvā ekāsanaṃ ekabhattaṃ paṭisevamānā āpāṇakoṭikaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carantā sāmaññaṃ karonti, taṃ bālā abyattā kātuṃ na sakkontīti. Bahūhi tattha sambādhāti tasmiṃ sāmaññasaṅkhāte ariyamagge bahū sambādhā, maggādhigamāya paṭipannassa bahū parissayāti attho.
「Appameyyaṃ paminantoti」:指有人妄图衡量那不可衡量的漏尽者,心中思量:“此人有如是戒、如是定、如是慧”。「Kodha vidvā vikappayeti」:此处,谁是有智的智者能够衡量呢?这是在说,唯有漏尽者衡量漏尽者,才有可能衡量。「Nivutaṃ maññeti」:但凡夫若试图去衡量,便被我视为被遮蔽、智慧颠倒之人。「Akissavanti」:“kissava”即指智慧,故此词意为无慧。显示巴利原文
Appameyyaṃ paminantoti appameyyaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalaṃ ‘‘ettakasīlo ayaṃ ettakasamādhi ettakapañño’’ti evaṃ minanto. Kodha vidvā vikappayeti ko idha vidvā medhāvī vikappeyya, khīṇāsavova khīṇāsavaṃ minanto vikappeyyāti dīpeti. Nivutaṃ maññeti yo pana puthujjano minetuṃ ārabhati, taṃ nivutaṃ avakujjapaññaṃ maññāmi. Akissavanti kissavā vuccati paññā, nippaññanti attho.
「Kuṭhārīti」:因其能砍伤自我,故喻为斧——即粗恶语。「Chindatīti」:它能斩断名为善根的根本。「Visaṃ halāhalaṃ ivāti」:犹如名为哈拉哈拉的剧毒。「Evaṃ viraddhaṃ pātetīti」:那有过失、犯错误、跌倒之人,便如此堕入诸恶趣。「Vācā dubbhāsitā yathāti」:如同因诽谤圣者而说出的恶语一般。显示巴利原文
Kuṭhārīti attacchedakaṭṭhena kuṭhārisadisī pharusavācā. Chindatīti kusalamūlasaṅkhāte mūleyeva nikantati. Visaṃ halāhalaṃ ivāti halāhalasaṅkhātaṃ visaṃ iva. Evaṃ viraddhaṃ pātetīti viraddhaṃ aparaddhaṃ khalitapuggalaṃ evaṃ apāyesu vinipāteti. Vācā dubbhāsitā yathāti yathā vācā ariyūpavādanavasena dubbhāsitā.
“Nindiyanti”指应受责备的。“Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti”:那个因功德殊胜而值得称赞的人,他却以恶欲等责备他。“Vicinātīti”指积聚。“Kalinti”指过失、错误。“Ayaṃ kalīti”这就是过失。“Akkhesūti”在骰子赌博中。“Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanāti”以自己的全部财产,乃至连自身也一并输掉。“Sugatesūti”:因其有美好的去处,到达善妙之地,正确地行走,又正确地宣说,故于诸被称为善逝的佛等圣者之中。“Manaṃ padosayeti”:若有人对那些圣者心生嗔恨,这心的嗔恨本身即是更大的过失。何以故?因“百千……乃至……恶”。在此,“sataṃ sahassānaṃ”指依尼罗部陀的计数方式为十万。“Chattiṃsatīti”另有三十六尼罗部陀。“Pañca cāti”依阿浮陀的计数方式为五个阿浮陀。因此,若以年计算,即是那么长的时间;在这段时间里显示巴利原文
Nindiyanti nindanīyaṃ. Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti yo guṇavisiṭṭhatāya pasaṃsāraho puggalo, taṃ vā so pāpicchatādīni āropetvā garahati. Vicinātīti upacināti. Kalinti aparādhaṃ. Ayaṃ kalīti ayaṃ aparādho. Akkhesūti jūtakīḷanakkhesu. Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanāti sabbena attano dhanenāpi attanāpi saddhiṃ. Sugatesūti sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammā gatattā, sammā ca gadattā sugatasaṅkhātesu buddhādīsu. Manaṃ padosayeti yo manaṃ padoseyya, tassa ayaṃ manopadoso eva mahattaro kalīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā sataṃ sahassānaṃ…pe… pāpakanti. Tattha sataṃ sahassānanti nirabbudagaṇanāya satasahassaṃ. Chattiṃsatīti aparāni chattiṃsati nirabbudāni. Pañca cāti abbudagaṇanāya pañca ca abbudāni. Tasmā vassagaṇanāya ettako so kālo, yaṃ kālaṃ ariyagarahivācaṃ manañca paṇidhāya pāpakaṃ nirayaṃ upeti, tattha paccatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañca saṅkhepena padumaniraye āyuppamāṇaṃ, vitthārena pana parato āgamissati.
“Lobhaguṇeti”:因被愚者视为一种“功德”,又因反复生起,故贪本身即是“贪功德”;在那贪功德中,所指的即是渴爱。“Anuyuttoti”指屡屡投入、一再随逐。“Avadaññūti”指不纳忠言者,即使对诸佛的教诫也不接受。“Maccharīti”以五种悭吝而成为悭吝的人。“Pesuṇiyaṃ anuyuttoti”指热衷于离间语,以离间上首弟子等方式造作。正因拘迦利迦在临终时,具寿大目犍连尊者如此教诫他而说了这些偈颂。“Mukhaduggāti”口出不善语、言辞粗恶者。“Vibhūtāti”真实已失,说虚诳语者。“Anariyāti”非圣者。“Bhūnahūti”断己福运、毁己智慧者。“Purisantāti”下劣之人。“Kalīti”不祥者。“Avajātakaputtāti”佛陀世尊的违逆劣子。“Mā bahubhāṇidha nerayikosīti”你今莫再多言,已成地狱众生。“Rajamākirasīti”你将烦恼的尘垢投掷于自身。显示巴利原文
Lobhaguṇeti ‘‘guṇo’’ti bālehi diṭṭhattā, anekakkhattuṃ pavattitattā ca lobhoyeva lobhaguṇo, tasmiṃ lobhaguṇe, taṇhāyāti attho. Anuyuttoti anu anu yutto. Avadaññūti avacanaññū, buddhānampi ovādassa aggahaṇato. Maccharīti pañcavidhamacchariyena maccharī. Pesuṇiyaṃ anuyuttoti pesuṇiyasmiṃ anuyutto aggasāvakānaṃ bhedanena. Kokālikañhi mīyamānaṃ ovadantena āyasmatā mahāmoggallānena bhāsitā imā gāthāti. Mukhaduggāti mukhavisama. Vibhūtāti vigatabhūta alikavādi. Anariyāti asappurisa. Bhūnahūti bhūtihanaka attano buddhivināsaka. Purisantāti purisādhama. Kalīti alakkhipurisa. Avajātakaputtāti buddhassa bhagavato avajātaputta. Mā bahubhāṇidha nerayikosīti idāni bahubhāṇī mā hohi, nerayiko asi jāto. Rajamākirasīti kilesarajaṃ attani pakkhipasi. Santeti samitakilese khīṇāsave. Kibbisakārīti pāpakāri. Papatanti narakaṃ.
“Idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyanti”:应知这部属于“杂染部分”的经,是为显示贪爱等因自性差别与阶段差别而有的种种分类,借众多经句以举例方式展现出来的“杂染部分”的经。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyanti idaṃ taṇhādīnaṃ sabhāvabhedato avatthābhedato ca anekabhedakaṃ dassetuṃ anekehi suttapadehi udāharaṇavasena dassitaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttanti veditabbaṃ.
「净信者」(pasannenāti)指相信业、业果等,具有净信心的人。显示巴利原文
Pasannenāti kammakammaphalādīni saddahantena.
「繁荣」(iddhaṃ)指以手饰、头饰等装饰品及宝珠、黄金等而庄严,亦即富裕。「富庶」(phītaṃ)指以油、蜂蜜、糖汁之类,以及财富、谷物之类而丰足广阔。「人群拥挤」(ākiṇṇamanussanti)指人群不间断,即人挨着人。「狭窄曲折的街巷」(sambādhabyūhanti)中,「byūhā」指那些未贯通的巷道,走进去后只能从原路出来,这种狭窄而密集的布局便称为「狭窄曲折的街巷」。这也显示了该城市居处稠密。「迷惑的」(bhantena)指尚未得到调伏,或在此处、彼处四处游荡的人。「无罪的」(apāpakaṃ)指并非卑劣、没有过失的。「以不动摇的净信」(aveccappasādena)指坚固、不可动摇的净信,即由彻底通达真谛而生起的净信。显示巴利原文
Iddhanti hatthūpagasīsūpagādialaṅkārehi maṇikanakādīhi ca samiddhaṃ. Phītanti telamadhuphāṇitādīhi ca dhanadhaññādīhi ca vipulaṃ. Ākiṇṇamanussanti nirantaramanussaṃ. Sambādhabyūhanti byūhā vuccanti anibbiddharacchāyo. Yesu paviṭṭhamaggeneva niggacchanti, te sambādhā byūhakā etthāti sambādhabyūhaṃ. Imināpi tassa nagarassa ghanavāsameva dīpeti. Bhantenāti damathaṃ anupagatena, ito cito ca paribbhamantena vā. Apāpakanti alāmakaṃ. Aveccappasādenāti acalappasādena, saccappaṭivedhato āgatena pasādena.
“他死后获得”(peccaso labhati)的意思是:凡是不用棍杖伤害众生的人,于他世若转生为人,便获得人间的快乐;若转生为天人,便获得天界的快乐;若超越此二种状态,便证得涅槃的快乐。显示巴利原文
Peccaso labhateti yo bhūte daṇḍena na hiṃsati, so puggalo paraloke manussabhūto manussasukhaṃ devabhūto dibbasukhaṃ ubhayaṃ atikkanto nibbānasukhaṃ labhatīti attho.
“将出发游行”(cārikaṃ pakkamissatī)意指世尊即将启程,游行各地。那么,世尊为何要在各地游行呢?诸佛世尊游行各地,有七种因缘:一、为调伏前往他方的所应调伏者;二、为令安住某处者生起精勤;三、为替修行者避免长期固定一处而住;四、为显示自身于任何处所皆无执着;五、因正自觉者曾住之处,能令彼地成就如塔庙般的地位;六、为令众多众生由瞻仰世尊、亲近世尊等,生起广大福德之流;七、为止息不雨等灾难。当知,诸佛世尊即由此七种因缘游行于各地。显示巴利原文
Cārikaṃ pakkamissatīti janapadacārikaṃ gamissati. Kasmā pana bhagavā janapadacārikaṃ caratīti? Sattahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto janapadacārikaṃ caranti – desantaragatānaṃ veneyyānaṃ vinayanattaṃ, tatra ṭhitānaṃ ussukkasamuppādanaṃ, bhāvakānaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nibaddhavāsapariharaṇaṃ attano ca tattha anāsaṅgadassanaṃ, sambuddhavasitaṭṭhānatāya desānaṃ cetiyabhāvasampādanaṃ, bahūnaṃ sattānaṃ dassanūpasaṅkamanādīhi puññoghappasavanaṃ, avuṭṭhiādiupaddavūpasamanañcāti imehi sattahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto janapadacārikaṃ carantīti veditabbaṃ.
“伊西达答与布拉那”指的是伊西达答和布拉那两人,其中伊西达答是斯陀含,布拉那是须陀洹。事件发生在他们自己的财富村,该村名为“沙计多”。“他们在路上安置了一个人”:据说,世尊通行的道路经过他们的村门,因此他们心想:“如果世尊在我们睡着或放逸时经过,我们就无缘得见了。”于是便在路中央安排了一个人。“他们跟随”:指他们并非远远地跟着,而是从后面紧紧跟随。因为世尊在车道中间沿着步行道行走,而另外两人则在道路两旁随行。“离开道路”:应当知道,诸佛有时与人一边同行一边寒暄,有时则与人一同站立交谈,有时也会与人一同坐下度过白天的一段时光。因此世尊思惟:“这两人在我的教法中是可意之人,且已证得果位,我就与他们一同坐下,用一段时间来接待他们吧。”于是世尊离开道路,来到某一棵树下。在铺好的座位上坐下——据说,他们让人拿着伞、鞋、手杖、涂脚油,以及八种饮品和兽皮坐具等前来,然后铺好坐具,献给世尊。导师便在那里坐下。退坐一面。显示巴利原文
Isidattapurāṇāti isidatto ca purāṇo ca, tesu isidatto sakadāgāmī. Purāṇo sotāpanno. Sāketeti ‘‘sāketo’’ti laddhanāme attano bhogagāmake. Magge purisaṃ ṭhapesunti tesaṃ kira gāmadvārena bhagavato gamanamaggo, tasmā ‘‘sace bhagavā amhākaṃ suttānaṃ vā pamattānaṃ vā gaccheyya, atha passituṃ na labheyyāmā’’ti maggamajjhe purisaṃ ṭhapesuṃ. Anubandhiṃsūti na dūratova, piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhiṃsu. Bhagavā hi sakaṭamaggassa majjhe jaṅghamaggena agamāsi, itare ubhosu passesu anugacchantā agamaṃsu. Maggā okkammāti buddhā hi kenaci saddhiṃ gacchantāva paṭisanthāraṃ karonti kenaci saddhiṃ ṭhitā kenaci saddhiṃ divasabhāgampi nisinnā, tasmā bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘ime mayhaṃ sāsane vallabhā āgataphalā, imehi saddhiṃ nisīditvā divasabhāgaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karissāmī’’ti. Maggato okkamitvā yenaññataraṃ rukkhamūlaṃ tenupasaṅkami. Paññatte āsane nisīdīti te kira chattupāhanakattaradaṇḍapādabbhañjanatelāni ceva aṭṭhavidhañca pānakaṃ sarabhapādapallaṅkañca gāhāpetvā āgamaṃsu. Atha naṃ pallaṅkaṃ paññapetvā adaṃsu. Satthā tattha nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsūti ‘‘chattupāhanādīni bhikkhusaṅghassa dethā’’ti vatvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu.
“将在舍卫城及憍萨罗人中开始游行”等所有的叙述,纯粹是依中央地区的情况而说的。何以故?因这是固定的惯例。要知道,世尊的游行范围仅限于中央地区。即便他前往边地,也必定在中央地区迎来破晓,这是固定的惯例,因此纯粹是依中央地区而说。“在迦尸人中”,意思是说在迦尸国。“同样地,在摩揭陀人中”,意思是说在摩揭陀国。对于“世尊将接近我们了”这句话,此处不仅仅是因为距离上的接近,他们才心生喜悦,而是想到:“现在我们可以进行布施、以香与花等去供养、得以听法、得以提问了”,他们因此感到喜悦。显示巴利原文
Sāvatthiyākosalesu cārikaṃ pakkamissatītiādi sabbaṃ majjhimadesavaseneva vuttaṃ. Kasmā? Niyatāciṇṇattā. Bhagavato hi cārikacaraṇaṃ majjhimadeseyeva. Sacepi paccantadese gacchati, majjhimadeseyeva aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetīti niyatāciṇṇaṃ, tasmā majjhimadesavaseneva vuttaṃ. Kāsīsūti kāsiraṭṭhato. Tathā magadhesūti magadharaṭṭhato. Āsanne no bhagavā bhavissatīti ettha na kevalaṃ āsannattā eva tesaṃ somanassaṃ hoti, atha kho ‘‘idāni dānaṃ dātuṃ gandhamālādipūjaṃ kātuṃ dhammaṃ sotuṃ pañhaṃ pucchituṃ labhissāmā’’ti nesaṃ somanassaṃ hoti.
“所以,良匠们,居家是狭窄的”这句话的意思是:良匠们,正因为你们在我远离时会产生不小的忧愁,在我接近时又会产生不小的喜悦,因此你们也应明白“居家是狭窄的”。正是由于居家的过患,你们才会有这样的反应。然而,假若你们舍弃居家而出家,那么无论是与我随行还是前来迎接,都不会再有那种情形了。为了阐明这个意义,世尊才如此宣说。在此,“狭窄”性应从“有私财、有障碍”的意义上来理解。因为即使住在宽广的宅院中,由于有私财、有障碍这层意义,居家也依然是狭窄的。“尘垢之路”,指贪欲等尘垢进入的途径,也就是这些尘垢生起之处。“出家则是空旷的”,指出家由于“无私财、无障碍”的意义,才是空旷的。要知道,即便是在一个仅四肘见方的小房间里,两位比丘结跏趺坐,座位相互触碰,但基于“无私财、无障碍”的意义,这种出家生活也称作是空旷的。“况且,良匠们,这也足以策励你们保持不放逸了。”显示巴利原文
Tasmātiha thapatayo sambādho gharāvāsoti thapatayo yasmā tumhākaṃ mayi dūrībhūte anappakaṃ domanassaṃ āsanne anappakaṃ somanassaṃ hoti, tasmāpi veditabbametaṃ ‘‘sambādho gharāvāso’’ti. Gharāvāsassa hi dosena tumhākaṃ evaṃ hoti. Sace pana gharāvāsaṃ pahāya pabbajitā assatha, evaṃ vo mayā saddhiṃyeva gacchantānañca āgacchantānañca taṃ na bhaveyyāti imamatthaṃ dīpento evamāha. Tattha sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena sambādhatā veditabbā. Mahāghare vasantassāpi hi sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhova. Rajopathoti rāgādirajānaṃ āgamanapatho, āgamanaṭṭhānanti attho. Abbhokāso pabbajjāti pabbajjā pana akiñcanaapalibodhaṭṭhena abbhokāso. Caturatanikepi hi gabbhe dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pallaṅkena pallaṅkaṃ ghaṭṭetvā nisinnānampi akiñcanāpalibodhaṭṭhena pabbajjā abbhokāso nāma hoti. Alañca pana vo thapatayo appamādāyāti evaṃ sambādhagharāvāse vasantānaṃ tumhākaṃ appamādameva kātuṃ yuttanti attho.
“象”(nāgā),即指大象。“适合骑乘的”(opavayhā),指适合国王骑乘的坐骑。他们所言“令一人坐前,一人坐后”,据说是:那两人佩戴一切庄严之具,将那两位妇女如此安置于二象之上,将国王的象置于中间,在两侧随行,因此他们才这样说。“象亦应善加守护”(nāgopi rakkhitabbo),意为应守护它,不令其作出任何异常之举。“那些姐妹亦应善加守护”(tāpi bhaginiyo),意为应守护她们,不令放逸。“自己亦应善加守护”(attāpī),是说:不说轻率之言、不随意动摇身体等,如此守护自身。若有人做出那些不当之行,便会受人指责:“此人是背叛主人者。”显示巴利原文
Nāgāti hatthino. Opavayhāti rañño ārohanayoggā. Ekaṃ purato ekaṃ pacchato nisīdāpemāti te kira dvepi janā sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitā dvīsu nāgesu tā itthiyo evaṃ nisīdāpetvā rañño nāgaṃ majjhe katvā ubhosu passesu gacchanti, tasmā evamāhaṃsu. Nāgopi rakkhitabboti yathā kiñci visesitaṃ na karoti, evaṃ rakkhitabbo hoti. Tāpi bhaginiyoti yathā pamādaṃ nāpajjanti, evaṃ rakkhitabbā honti. Attāpīti sitakathitavikkhepitādīni akarontehi attāpi rakkhitabbo hoti . Evaṃ karonto hi ‘‘sāmidubbhako eso’’ti niggahetabbo hoti.
所以,诸匠师啊(Tasmātiha thapatayo):因为国王常令你们保管王家财物,由此看来,居家生活是狭窄的,是尘垢进入的路径;然而,却无人令身穿粪扫衣的比丘如此保管,因此,出家才是空旷的。这个道理于一切处都是如此。“况且,诸匠师啊,这也足以策励你们于不放逸”(Alañca kho thapatayo appamādāya),这句是在教导:你们应当唯修不放逸。显示巴利原文
Tasmātiha thapatayoti yasmā tumhe rājā niccaṃ rājabhaṇḍaṃ paṭicchāpeti, tasmāpi sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho. Yasmā pana paṃsukūlikaṃ bhikkhuṃ evaṃ paṭicchāpento natthi, tasmā abbhokāso pabbajjā, evaṃ sabbatthāpi. Alañca kho thapatayo appamādāya, appamādameva karothāti dasseti.
“Muttacāga”,即全然放弃的布施。“Payatapāṇī”,指为了布施往来之人而洗净双手。“Vosaggarato”,指乐于称为“Vosagga”的舍离。“Yācayogo”,指与应乞求相应。或有读作“Yājayogo”,意为与布施相应。“Dānasaṃvibhāgarato”:以此说明,即使获得极微少之物,亦乐于从中分享。“Appaṭivibhatta”,指不作如此划分:“此部分归我们,彼部分供尊者们”,亦即一切皆处于唯应布施的状态。居士们,具足这四种法的圣弟子是入流者,意思是,入流者即是具足这些法者。由此显示,入流者必定获得此四种法。显示巴利原文
Muttacāgoti vissaṭṭhacāgo. Payatapāṇīti āgatāgatānaṃ dānatthāya dhotahattho. Vosaggaratoti vosaggasaṅkhāte cāge rato. Yācayogoti yācitabbayutto. ‘‘Yājayogo’’tipi pāṭho, dānayuttoti attho. Dānasaṃvibhāgaratoti etena appamattakampi kiñci labhitvā tatopi saṃvibhāge rato. Appaṭivibhattanti ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ bhavissati, idaṃ ayyāna’’nti evaṃ akatavibhāgaṃ, sabbaṃ dātabbameva hutvā ṭhitanti attho. Imehi kho thapatayo catūhi dhammehi samannāgato ariyasāvako sotāpanno hotīti sotāpanno imehi dhammehi samannāgato hotīti attho. Etena sotāpannena imesaṃ catunnaṃ dhammānaṃ ekantato labbhamānataṃ dasseti.
如此,以间接方式说明了那些居士们具足这四种法后,现在为了以直接方式说明,便说出了“Tumhe kho thapatayo”等语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tesaṃ thapatīnaṃ imehi catūhi dhammehi samannāgataṃ pariyāyena dassetvā idāni nippariyāyena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tumhe kho thapatayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“Sahassaṃ kappakoṭiyo”意为有一千个自体(即一千劫);也有读作“Asīti kappakoṭiyo”,意为曾有八十俱胝寿劫。那么,这些是在何处呢?回答说“deve ceva manusse ca”,即在天界与人界中。“Saṃviruḷhamhīti”指因处处抽芽而茂盛。“Alabhiṃhanti”意为“我获得了”。“Ajja tiṃsaṃ tato kappā”指从那劫以来,至今为第三十劫。“Tassā saññāya vāsanā”意为由于那佛随念之想的熏习余势。显示巴利原文
Sahassaṃ kappakoṭiyoti sahassaṃ attabhāvā ahesunti attho. ‘‘Asīti kappakoṭiyo’’tipi pāṭho, asītiāyukappakoṭiyo ahesunti attho. Kattha pana te ahesunti? Āha ‘‘deve ceva manusse cā’’ti, devesu ceva manussesu cāti attho. Saṃviruḷhamhīti samantato pallavaggahaṇena viruḷhe. Alabhiṃhanti alabhiṃ ahaṃ. Ajja tiṃsaṃ tato kappāti tato kappato ajja sampati ayaṃ kappo tiṃsatimo. Tassā saññāya vāsanāti tassa buddhagatāya saññāya vāsanato.
「Taṇhānighātaka」指断除渴爱者。「Vaṭaṃsaka」指鲜花所成的耳饰。「Sabbapupphehilaṅkata」指以种种花严饰。「Lapanantarā」指上下唇之间。「Okkā」指光明。「Muddhanantaradhāyathā」指隐没于头顶。「Kaṅkhaṃ vitarā」指消除疑惑。在「Yassa taṃ sabbadhammesu, sadā ñāṇaṃ pavattati」中,「ti」为语助词;全句意为:他的智慧于一切法中恒常运转。那位一切知者世尊对阿难长老说这番话,是上下的联结。「Rājā raṭṭhe bhavissati」指将成为整个王国的国王。「Carima」指最后一生。「Sacchikatvā」指亲身证知后证得。「Dhamma」指四圣谛法,或辟支菩提。显示巴利原文
Taṇhānighātakoti taṇhāya samucchedako. Vaṭaṃsakoti pupphamayakaṇṇiko. Sabbapupphehilaṅkatoti nānāpupphehi alaṅkato. Lapanantarāti uttarādharoṭṭhānaṃ antarato. Okkāti pabhā. Muddhanantaradhāyathāti muddhani antaradhāyatha. Kaṅkhaṃ vitarāti vimatiṃ vinodehi. Yassa taṃ sabbadhammesu, sadā ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti tanti nipātamattaṃ. Yassa sabbadhammesu ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhattā sadā ñāṇaṃ pavattati. So sabbaññū bhagavā theraṃ ānandaṃ etadabravīti sambandho. Rājā raṭṭhe bhavissatīti sabbasmiṃ raṭṭhe rājā bhavissati. Carimanti carimabhavaṃ. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā. Dhammatanti catusaccadhammaṃ, paccekabodhiṃ vā.
「Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvaṃ」指一艘两侧均以黄金装饰所覆蔽的金船。「Pañhaṃ puṭṭhā viyākāsi, sakkassa iti me sutaṃ」:正如那位天神回答帝释之所问,我也如此听闻——大目犍连尊者将自己依所听闻的那样,向世尊述说。显示巴利原文
Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvanti ubhosu passesu suvaṇṇālaṅkārehi paṭimaṇḍitavasena chāditaṃ suvaṇṇanāvaṃ. Pañhaṃ puṭṭhā viyākāsi, sakkassa iti me sutanti yathā sā devatā pañhaṃ puṭṭhā sakkassa byākāsi, evaṃ mayāpi sutanti āyasmā mahāmoggallāno attanā yathāsutaṃ taṃ bhagavato vadati.
“Paṃsuthūpesu”指的是将舍利安放其中,再用泥土建造的塔。这样的塔便称为忆念世尊的纪念物,因此说“uddissakatesu dasabaladharānaṃ”(在那些为十力者所建的纪念物旁)。显示巴利原文
Paṃsuthūpesūti sarīradhātuṃ abbhantare ṭhapetvā paṃsūhi katathūpesu. Evañhi te bhagavantaṃ uddissakatā nāma honti, tenevāha – ‘‘uddissakatesu dasabaladharāna’’nti.
“Devaputtasarīravaṇṇā”指如同天子身躯般的色泽。“Subhagasaṇṭhitī”指具足吉祥美好的形态。“Uḷāraṃ vata taṃ āsi”意为我所造作的那件福德,实在广大殊胜。“Yāhaṃ”即是“那曾是我”。“Satasahassaṃ kappe, mudito thūpaṃ apūjesi”意为:供养塔之后,我于十万劫中恒怀喜悦。“Anāgantuna vinipātaṃ”指不再堕入恶趣。“Yaṃ cakkhu”指那智慧之眼。“Paṇihitaṃ”指已经安立。“Vimuttacittamhi”是说“我是心解脱者”。“Vidhūtalato”指已抖落渴爱的藤蔓,也就是断尽了渴爱。显示巴利原文
Devaputtasarīravaṇṇāti devaputtasarīrasadisavaṇṇā. Subhagasaṇṭhitīti sobhaggayuttasaṇṭhānā. Uḷāraṃ vata taṃ āsīti taṃ mayā kataṃ puññaṃ uḷāraṃ vata ahosi. Yāhanti yā ahaṃ. Satasahassaṃ kappe, mudito thūpaṃ apūjesīti thūpaṃ pūjetvā satasahassaṃ āyukappe ahaṃ muditoti attho. Anāgantuna vinipātanti apāyupapattiṃ anupagantvā. Yaṃ cakkhunti yaṃ paññācakkhuṃ. Paṇihitanti ṭhapitaṃ. Vimuttacittamhīti vimuttacitto amhi. Vidhūtalatoti vidhūtataṇhālato, samucchinnataṇhoti attho.
「Sāmākapatthodanamattaṃ」指仅一升稗子饭的量。「Akhile」指因断除五种心荒芜,故心无滞碍。「Tasmiñca okappayi dhammamuttamaṃ」意谓对那位独觉佛,于无上法——辟支菩提生起净信,确信‘此人必具无上之法’。「Tasmiñca dhamme paṇidhesiṃ mānasaṃ」表明我也发心愿:欲亲证彼所证得之法。而「Bhave kudāsupi ca mā apekkhavā」则意为无论何时、生于何界,皆绝无期盼之心;此亦是心的誓愿,乃上下文的关联。显示巴利原文
Sāmākapatthodanamattanti sāmākatiṇānaṃ nāḷikodanamattaṃ. Akhileti pañcannaṃ cetokhilānaṃ abhāvena akhile. Tasmiñca okappayi dhammamuttamanti tasmiṃ paccekabuddhe uttamadhammaṃ paccekabodhiṃ ‘‘uttamadhammena nāma imasmiṃ bhavitabba’’nti saddahiṃ. ‘‘Tasmiñca dhamme paṇidhesiṃ mānasa’’nti iminā paṭiladdhadhammaṃ ahampi sacchikareyyanti cittaṃ paṇidahiṃ. Bhave kudāsupi ca mā apekkhavāti katthaci bhave apekkhavā mā bhaveyyanti ca paṇidhesiṃ mānasanti sambandho.
「Kurūsu」指在郁单越人中。「Dīghāyukesu」指寿命长远者中,以其寿长千岁而言。「Amamesu」指无我所执者中。「Pāṇīsu」指有情中。「Ahīnagāmīsu」指所得不失、尽其寿数而无衰损者中。「Tidasopapajjathā」意为成为三十三天而投生,或生于三十三天界。「Visiṭṭhakāyūpagato」指投生殊胜之身,即种种异色天身。「Yasassisū」指眷属众多者中。「Hitāhitāsihī」指超越善与不善者。「Paccakkhaṃ khvimaṃ」意为“此是现前可见的”。显示巴利原文
Kurūsūti uttarakurūsu. Dīghāyukesūti tesaṃ vassasahassāyukatāya vuttaṃ. Amamesūti apariggahesu. Pāṇīsūti sattesu. Ahīnagāmīsūti yathāladdhasampattīhi yāvatāyukaṃ aparihīnasabhāvesu . Tidasopapajjathāti tāvatiṃso hutvā upapajjiṃ, tidase vā tāvatiṃsabhavane upapajjiṃ. Visiṭṭhakāyūpagatoti visiṭṭhakāyesu nānāvaṇṇakāyesu upagato. Yasassisūti parivāravantesu. Hitāhitāsihīti kusalākusale vītivattīhi. Paccakkhaṃ khvimanti paccakkhaṃ kho imaṃ vacananti adhippāyo.
“Sakāsi”意为“他做了”。“Balimābhihārīti”意为“他持来供养的供品”。“Patitassa ekaṃ”意为“从他手中掉落了一朵花”。显示巴利原文
Sakāsīti so akāsi. Balimābhihārīti pūjābaliṃ abhihari. Patitassa ekanti tassa hatthato ekapupphaṃ patitaṃ.
“Upariṭṭha”指“在上方虚空中站立”。“Ariṭṭha”指一位名为阿利吒的独觉佛。“内与外”指内境与外境。“曾为我所知”指那些过去曾为我所了知的。“生死的轮回,现在不再有后有”:意思是,反复经历生死的那个轮回,也称为后有,如今它已不再存在。显示巴利原文
Upariṭṭhanti upari vehāse ṭhitaṃ. Ariṭṭhanti ariṭṭhaṃ nāma paccekasambuddhaṃ. Ajjhattañca bahiddhā cāti ajjhattavisayā ca bahiddhavisayā ca. Ye me vijjiṃsūti ye me pubbe vijjamānā ahesuṃ. Jātimaraṇasaṃsāro, natthi dāni punabbhavoti punappunaṃ jāyanamīyanabhūto saṃsāro punabbhavoti ca vuccati, so ca dāni natthīti attho.
此《习气分经》,应知是为阐明习气分福德的种种经文语句,通过举例的方式而开示的《习气分经》。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti idaṃ vāsanābhāgapuññavibhāvanānaṃ nānāsuttapadānaṃ udāharaṇavasena dassitaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti veditabbaṃ.
“上方、下方……乃至不再有后有”——这一段称为“抉择分经”,因其能起到度越暴流的圣道作用。“不应作思”:指不应生起如此之心念。“法性”:即诸法的自性。显示巴利原文
‘‘Uddhaṃ adho…pe… apunabbhavāyā’’ti idaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttanti vuttaṃ oghataraṇassa ariyamaggakiccattā. Na cetanā karaṇīyāti na cittaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Dhammatāti dhammasabhāvo.
「当……时」:即于某时。「显现」:即生起。「诸法」:指能证悟顺缘起、成就菩提分的法。或可解「显现」为令之明了,依现观而显发;「诸法」则指四圣谛法。「热忱」:指以烧尽烦恼为本质的精进。「具热忱者」:即具备正勤精进之人。「禅那者」:指藉由所缘审察禅那与特相审察禅那而修习者。「婆罗门」:指已舍断罪恶的诸漏尽者。那时,他的一切疑惑悉皆消散:对于此法现前之人,如“尊者,谁触?……世尊说:‘此问不适当’”等语,以及“尊者,什么是老死?这是谁的老死?……世尊说:‘此问不适当’”等语,所涉缘起的疑惑;复由未通达缘起所引生的“我于过去世曾存在吗?”等十六种疑惑,及“于佛有疑、于法有疑”等八种疑惑——所有这一切疑惑,全数消失、离去、灭尽。何以故?因其了知有因之法:即以无明等为因,了知、遍知、通达此整个有因的诸行等纯大苦蕴之法。显示巴利原文
Yadā haveti yasmiṃ have kāle. Pātubhavantīti uppajjanti. Dhammāti anulomapaccayākārapaṭivedhasādhakā bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Pātubhavantīti vā pakāsenti, abhisamayavasena pākaṭā honti. Dhammāti catuariyasaccadhammā. Ātāpo vuccati kilesasantāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ. Ātāpinoti sammappadhānavīriyavato. Jhāyatoti ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena ca jhānena jhāyantassa. Brāhmaṇassāti bāhitapāpassa khīṇāsavassa. Athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbāti athassa evaṃ pātubhūtadhammassa yā tā ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatīti? No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.12) nayena ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇaṃ, kassa panidaṃ jarāmaraṇanti? No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.35) ca nayena paccayākārakaṅkhā vuttā. Yā ca paccayākārasseva appaṭividdhattā ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’ntiādikā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) soḷasakaṅkhā ‘‘buddhe kaṅkhati dhamme kaṅkhatī’’tiādikā (dha. sa. 1008) aṭṭha ca kaṅkhā āgatā, tā sabbā vapayanti apagacchanti nirujjhanti, kasmā? Yato pajānāti sahetudhammaṃ, yasmā avijjādikena hetunā sahetukaṃ imaṃ saṅkhārādiṃ kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhadhammaṃ pajānāti aññāsi paṭivijjhati.
「因为了知诸缘的灭尽」:即因他知、了知、通达了名为诸缘灭尽的涅槃。是故,当这位具热忱、修禅那的婆罗门,如上所述之法显现时,那些因不了知涅槃而可能生起的疑惑,在那一刻全都消失。显示巴利原文
Yato khayaṃ paccayānaṃ avedīhi yasmā paccayānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi, tasmā yadāssa ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa vuttappakārā dhammā pātubhavanti. Athassa yā nibbānassa aviditattā kaṅkhā uppajjeyyuṃ, sabbāpi tā kaṅkhā vapayantīti.
「林居者」:指住于阿兰若处的人。「以不为人知的乞食维生」:指在诸多家宅间不为人识,恒以新来者的身份依乞食而活。抑或,若于特定有权势者家中,寻求辛辣佐料与美味食物而行乞,则称为“知而乞”;顺次挨户立于门前所得之混杂食物,则称为“不为人知的乞食”,此处即指后者。以如是方式维生。「于诸欲无期望者」:对事欲与烦恼欲皆无所期盼。显示巴利原文
Āraññanti āraññakaṃ. Aññātuñchena yāpentanti kulesu aññāto niccanavoyeva hutvā uñchena piṇḍacariyāya yāpentaṃ. Atha vā abhilakkhitesu issarajanagehesu kaṭukabhaṇḍasambhāraṃ sugandhabhojanaṃ pariyesantassa uñchanaṃ ñātuñchanaṃ nāma, gharapaṭipāṭiyā pana dvāre ṭhitena laddhamissakabhojanaṃ aññātuñchanaṃ nāma. Idaṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Tena yāpentaṃ. Kāmesu anapekkhinanti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu nirapekkhaṃ.
「斩断」:即砍杀。「安乐而卧」:因不被忿怒的热恼所焚烧,故能安乐而卧。「不忧」:因忿怒灭尽,忧悲已失,故不忧愁。「毒根」:指具有苦报的。「甘甜之顶」:指被骂时回骂、被打时回击所生起的乐受,就这方面而称为“甘甜之顶”。在这里,“末端”即称为“顶”。「圣者」:指佛陀等。显示巴利原文
Chetvāti vadhitvā. Sukhaṃ setīti kodhapariḷāhena aparidayhamānattā sukhaṃ sayati. Na socatīti kodhavināsena vinaṭṭhadomanassattā na socati. Visamūlassāti dukkhavipākassa. Madhuraggassāti yaṃ akkuṭṭhassa paccakkositvā pahaṭassa paṭippaharitvā sukhaṃ uppajjati, taṃ sandhāya so ‘‘madhuraggo’’ti vutto. Imasmiñhi ṭhāne pariyosānaṃ ‘‘agga’’nti vuttaṃ. Ariyāti buddhādayo.
「能杀」:即可能杀害。「已生起」:指未被根除、未被镇伏而生起,或以现行方式活动着。「应驱除」:应将其从自身相续中遣除。显示巴利原文
Haneti haneyya. Uppatitanti asamugghāṭitaṃ avikkhambhituppannavasena samudācāruppannavasena samudācarantaṃ. Vinodayeti attano santānato nīhareyya.
“以刀”:此为教法的开头,意指单刃等刀具。“被上方击打”:即被击打。击打有四种:于上方站立、向下击打,名为“上方击”;于下方站立、向上击打,名为“下方击”;如穿刺门栓般刺穿而击,名为“穿透击”;其余一切击打,名为“散击”。此处所取的是“上方击”,因为这是最为剧烈的,箭镞难以拔出,治疗困难,内部会生脓血。脓血无法流出,便堵塞疮口。若要排脓血,须将病人绑缚在床上,头向下倒悬,他会遭受近乎死亡或等死的痛苦。“游行”:即应安住。显示巴利原文
Sattiyāti desanāsīsametaṃ, ekatodhārādinā satthenāti attho. Omaṭṭhoti pahaṭo. Cattāro hi pahārā omaṭṭho ummaṭṭho maṭṭho vimaṭṭhoti. Tattha upari ṭhatvā adhomukhaṃ dinnappahāro omaṭṭho nāma, adho ṭhatvā uddhaṃ mukhaṃ dinnappahāro ummaṭṭho nāma, aggaḷasūci viya vinivijjhitvā kato maṭṭho nāma, seso sabbopi vimaṭṭho nāma. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne omaṭṭho gahito. So hi sabbadāruṇo duruddharaṇasallo duttikiccho antodoso antopubbalohito ca hoti. Pubbalohitaṃ anikkhamitvā vaṇamukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati. Pubbalohitaṃ nīharitukāmehi mañcena saddhiṃ bandhitvā adhosiro kātabbo hoti, maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Paribbajeti vihareyya.
以此偈颂说明了什么?如同一个被刀从上方击伤的人,为拔箭与疗伤而发起精进、努力、奋勉;又如同一个头被焚烧、头顶着火的人,为熄灭头火而发起精进、努力、奋勉。同样地,世尊教导:比丘为断除欲贪,应当具念、不放逸地安住。显示巴利原文
Imāya gāthāya kiṃ kathitaṃ? Yathā sattiyā omaṭṭhapuriso sallubbāhanavaṇatikicchanānaṃ atthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati payogaṃ karoti parakkamati. Yathā ca dayhamāne matthake ādittasiro tassa nibbāpanatthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati payogaṃ karoti parakkamati, evamevaṃ bhikkhu kāmarāgappahānāya sato appamatto hutvā vihareyya bhagavāti kathesi.
天神如此说后,世尊便思惟:“这位天神把譬喻说得很牢固,但只把握了少许义理。纵使她反复宣说,也只会说及欲贪的镇伏断除;只要欲贪尚未被圣道彻底根除,它就一直尾随不舍。”于是,世尊便取这同一个譬喻,依初圣道来扭转天神而开示,诵出第二偈颂:“如被利剑所刺……”(sattiyā viya omaṭṭho)。其义理,应依照前面所说的理路来理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ devatāya kathite atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘imāya devatāya upamā daḷhaṃ katvā ānītā, atthaṃ pana parittakaṃ gahetvā ṭhitā. Punappunaṃ kathentīpi hi esā kāmarāgassa vikkhambhanappahānameva katheyya, yāva ca kāmarāgo maggena na samugghāṭiyyati, tāva anubandhova hotī’’ti tameva upamaṃ gahetvā paṭhamamaggavasena devatāya vinivaṭṭetvā dassento ‘‘sattiyā viya omaṭṭho’’ti dutiyagāthamāha. Tassattho purimanayānusārena veditabbo.
「世间味」:指五欲功德。「期望寂静」:指期望一切行寂灭的涅槃。「有慧」:指具足智慧的人。「心已向」:指其心已导向涅槃。「已离欲想」:指由于与第四道相应的正断离,已于一切处远离欲想。亦有「已离欲」的读法。而“于欲想”是处格。在《有偈品》中有“于诸欲想中”的读法。因为藉由四道已超越十结,故为「超越一切结者」。或者,即使仅凭第四道,由于超越五上分结,而对种种处的欢喜——称为‘喜’的渴爱已尽,且三有的‘有’已尽,因此是「喜有已尽者」。这样的漏尽比丘,不会沉没于甚深的轮回大海。显示巴利原文
Lokāmisanti kāmaguṇo. Santipekkhoti sabbasaṅkhārūpasamaṃ nibbānaṃ apekkhamāno. Paññavāti paññavanto. Pahitattoti nibbānaṃ patipesitacitto. Virato kāmasaññāyāti yāya kāyaci sabbato kāmasaññāya catutthamaggasampayuttāya samucchedaviratiyā virato. ‘‘Viratto’’tipi pāṭho. Kāmasaññāyāti pana bhummavacanaṃ hoti. Sagāthāvagge (saṃ. ni. 1.96) ‘‘kāmasaññāsū’’ti pāṭho. Catūhi maggehi dasannampi saṃyojanānaṃ atītattā sabbasaṃyojanātīto. Catutthamaggeneva vā uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanātīto tatra tatrābhinandanato nandisaṅkhātāya taṇhāya tiṇṇañca bhavānaṃ parikkhīṇattā nandibhavaparikkhīṇo. So tādiso khīṇāsavo bhikkhu gambhīre saṃsāraṇṇave na sīdati.
「信」者:指阿拉汉、独觉佛与佛陀的声闻弟子,藉由前期身善行等法及后期三十七菩提分法等法,证得了涅槃。此人信受此阿拉汉法,为证涅槃而获得世间与出世间智慧。然而,这并非单凭信即能成就。实际上,因为由信而生起,所以会亲近;亲近便会敬奉;敬奉便会倾耳;倾耳便得闻法。因此,从亲近开始,次第及于闻法,藉由听受,便获得了智慧。显示巴利原文
Saddahānoti yena pubbabhāge kāyasucaritādibhedena, aparabhāge ca sattattiṃsabodhipakkhiyabhedena dhammena arahanto buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakā nibbānaṃ pattā. Taṃ saddahāno arahataṃ dhammaṃ nibbānappattiyā lokiyalokuttarapaññaṃ labhati, tañca kho na saddhāmattakeneva. Yasmā pana saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsati, payirupāsanto sotaṃ odahati, odahitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, tasmā upasaṅkamanato paṭṭhāya yāva dhammassavanena sussūsaṃ labhate paññaṃ.
这是什么意思呢?这是说:即便已信受那法,还应时时前往亲近亲教师与和尚,并通过履行义务来敬奉他们。当藉由敬奉,师长得心相应,想要开示法义时,他便对所欲证得的法生起求闻之心,倾耳谛听。这样听闻,就能获得智慧。而且,正因为不放逸能令正念不忘失,具有辨别善说与不善说的能力,所以只有明智者才能获得这种智慧,其他人则不能。因此说:“不放逸,明智者。”显示巴利原文
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Taṃ dhammaṃ saddahitvāpi ācariyupajjhāye kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvāpi vattakaraṇena payirupāsitvā yadā payirupāsanāya ārādhitacittā kiñci vattukāmā honti. Atha adhigatāya sotukāmatāya sotaṃ odahitvā suṇanto labhatīti evaṃ sussūsampi ca satiavippavāsena appamatto subhāsitadubbhāsitaññutāya vicakkhaṇo eva labhati, na itaro. Tenāha – ‘‘appamatto vicakkhaṇo’’ti.
“行适宜者”:指不错失时机、地点等,对于世间法与出世间法,修习与之相称的证得之道的人。“担当者”:指依于心所层面的精进力而不舍责任的人。“奋起者”:指依于身层面的精进力,具足奋勉、毫不懈怠的人。“获得财富”:指证得世间与出世间的财富。“以真实”:即通过言语上的真实与胜义上的真实。佛陀、独觉佛、圣弟子在证得涅槃的同时,也获得了称誉。“施予”他人所欲、所求之物,即是结交善友——意为结交与成办。或者说,能布施难以布施之物,即是结交善友;当知由此布施之行,亦已摄受了四种摄事。凭借这些,得以结交善友。“从此世到他世,彼命终之后,实无忧愁”:意思是,具足这些信等法之人,从此世身坏命终、往生他世之后,便无忧愁,亦无有令其忧愁之因。显示巴利原文
Patirūpakārīti desakālādīni ahāpetvā lokiyassa lokuttarassa dhammassa patirūpaṃ adhigamūpāyaṃ karotīti patirūpakārī. Dhuravāti cetasikavīriyavasena anikkhittadhuro. Uṭṭhātāti kāyikavīriyavasena uṭṭhānasampanno asithilaparakkamo. Vindate dhananti lokiyalokuttaradhanaṃ adhigacchati. Saccenāti vacīsaccena paramatthasaccena ca. Buddhapaccekabuddhaariyasāvakā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇantā kittimpi pāpuṇantiyeva. Dadanti paresaṃ yaṃ kiñci icchitaṃ patthitaṃ dento mittāni ganthati sampādeti karotīti attho. Duddadaṃ vā dadanto ganthati, dānamukhena cattāripi saṅgahavatthūni gahitānīti veditabbāni. Tehi mittāni karonti. Asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ, sa ve pecca na socatīti yassa puggalassa ime saddhādayo dhammā vijjanti, so imasmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ gantvā na socati, sokakāraṇaṃ tassa natthīti attho.
「如果在家求欲者具有这四法——真实、法、坚忍、舍弃,那么此人死后确实不会忧愁。」(Yassete caturo dhammā, saddhassa gharamesino; Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socatīti. Saṃ. Ni. 1.246; Su. Ni. 190)——
——(《相应部》第1集第246经;《经集》第190偈)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yassete caturo dhammā, saddhassa gharamesino; Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 190) –
此处所引的偈颂省略了其余部分。在《旷野经》中,当旷野夜叉以‘如何获得慧’等问题请问时,世尊宣说了这些偈颂。显示巴利原文
Gāthaṃ avasesaṃ katvā udāhaṭaṃ. Āḷavakasutte hi imā gāthā āḷavakena ‘‘kathaṃ su labhate pañña’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 187) puṭṭhena bhagavatā bhāsitāti.
“以任何方式”:以任何原因,或以任何方法。“共住”:在同一处共同居住、相会。“那样的”:如此相会的、应受悲悯的男子。“若以净信之心”:以被悲悯所激励的净信心。“即不因此而成为所系缚者”:不因那样所说的教诫而被欲贪等结所系缚。“凡有所悲悯、垂怜”:为令证得圣道的悲悯与慈悯。显示巴利原文
Yena kenaci vaṇṇenāti yena kenaci kāraṇena, pakārena vā. Saṃvāsoti ekasmiṃ ṭhāne sahavāso samāgamo. Tanti tathā samāgataṃ anukampitabbaṃ purisaṃ. Manasā ce pasannenāti karuṇāsamussāhitena pasādena pasannena manasā. Na tena hoti saṃyuttoti tena yathāvuttena anusāsanena kāmacchandādīnaṃ saṃyojanavasena saṃyutto nāma na hoti. Yānukampā anuddayāti yā ariyamaggasampāpanavasena karuṇāyanā, mettāyanā cāti attho.
“贪与嗔”——贪与嗔,如前文所述。“以何为因”:以什么为因,以什么为缘?这是对“从何”一词的语尾变化所作的阐释;应知在复合词中,它并未被省略。“不乐、乐、毛发竖立从何生起”:那于边远处的坐卧所,以及于增上善法中所生的不乐、厌烦;那于五欲功德中所生的乐、喜悦、耽着、嬉戏;以及因毛发竖立之生起而被称为毛发竖立的内心惊颤——这三种法,从何而生?从何出生?此为问。“从何现起”:从何生起之后。“心”:指善心。“思惟”:指欲思惟等。“如诸幼童放飞鸦”:犹如幼童游戏时,以线系住乌鸦之足,而后放飞、抛出;同样,那些不善思惟从何现起之后,便将善心放飞了?此为问。显示巴利原文
Rāgo ca doso cāti rāgadosā heṭṭhā vuttanayāva. Kutonidānāti kiṃnidānā kiṃhetukā. Paccattavacanassa hi ayaṃ to-ādeso, samāse cassa lopābhāvo veditabbo. Aratī ratī lomahaṃso kutojāti yāyaṃ pantesu senāsanesu, adhikusalesu ca dhammesu arati ukkaṇṭhitā, yā ca pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rati abhirati āsatti kīḷanādi, yo ca lomahaṃsasamuṭṭhānato lomahaṃsasaṅkhāto cittutrāso, ime tayo dhammā kuto jātā kuto nibbattāti pucchā. Kuto samuṭṭhāyāti kuto uppajjitvā. Manoti kusalacittaṃ. Vitakkāti kāmavitakkādayo. Kumārakā dhaṅkamivosajantīti yathā kumārakā kīḷantā kākaṃ suttena pāde bandhitvā osajanti khipanti, evaṃ kusalamanaṃ akusalavitakkā kuto samuṭṭhāya osajantīti pucchā.
“由贪”等是第二偈颂,是对它的解答。其中,“从此”是就有身而说。因为贪与嗔以有身为因,不乐、乐以及毛发竖立从有身而生。欲寻等正是从有身生起后,将善心放舍。因此,为了遮止其他认为是本性等为因的说法,而说:“以此为因,从此生起”。此处词句成就的方法,应如前一个偈颂所述那样理解。显示巴利原文
Rāgocāti dutiyagāthā tassā vissajjanaṃ. Tattha itoti attabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha. Attabhāvanidānā hi rāgadosā, arati rati lomahaṃsā ca attabhāvato jātā. Kāmavitakkādayo attabhāvato eva samuṭṭhāya kusalamanaṃ osajanti. Tena tadaññaṃ pakatiādikāraṇaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘itonidānā ito samuṭṭhāyā’’ti. Purimagāthāya vuttanayenettha saddasiddhi veditabbā.
现在,为了证成前文就“以此为因”等处所说的“以有身为因、从有身而生、从有身生起”的义理,而说:“由爱生,自身所生”。因为这些从贪乃至寻为止的法,都是由渴爱之爱而生。而且它们生起时,是在名为有身的五取蕴集合体中、于自身中生起。因此说:“由爱生,自身所生”。现在,为了显示此义而举出譬喻:“如同孟加拉榕的枝干所生”。“枝干所生”,是指在枝干上生出的气根。这是说:就如同孟加拉榕的、称为枝干所生的气根,在有名为树液之爱时便会生起,且生起时是在那棵孟加拉榕的各各树枝部分上产生;同样,这些贪等烦恼,于内有渴爱之爱时便会生起,且生起时是在那个有身的眼等部位、在各各可意境上产生。因此说:“由爱生,自身所生”。“广泛地缠缚于诸欲”:意思是,因为贪以五种欲功德等方式而有种种差别,嗔以嗔怒事等方式而有种种差别,不乐等也各自依各自的方式而有差别,所以显示巴利原文
Idāni yvāyaṃ ‘‘itonidānā’’tiādīsu attabhāvanidānā attabhāvato jātā attabhāvato samuṭṭhāyāti attho vutto, taṃ sādhento āha – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Ete hi rāgādayo vitakkapariyosānā taṇhāsnehena jātā. Tathā jāyantā ca pañcupādānakkhandhabhede attabhāvasaṅkhāte attani sambhūtā. Tenāha – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Idāni tadatthajotikaṃ upamaṃ dasseti ‘‘nigrodhasseva khandhajā’’ti. Tattha khandhajāti khandhesu jātā pārohā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nigrodhassa khandhajasaṅkhātā pārohā āporasasaṅkhāte snehe sati jāyanti, jāyantā ca tasmiṃyeva nigrodhe tesu tesu sākhappadesesu sambhavanti, evaṃ ete rāgādayo ajjhattaṃ taṇhāsnehe sati jāyanti, jāyantā ca tasmiṃyeva attabhāve tesu tesu cakkhādippadesesu iṭṭhārammaṇesu sambhavanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Puthu visattā kāmesūti yasmā rāgopi pañcakāmaguṇikādivasena, dosopi āghātavatthuādivasena aratiādayopi tassa tassa bhedassa vasenāti sabbathā sabbepime kilesā puthu anekappakārā hutvā vatthudvārārammaṇādivasena tesu tesu kāmesu tathā tathā visattā laggā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitā. Kimiva? Māluvāva vitatā vane yathā vane vitatā māluvā tesu tesu rukkhasākhappasākhādibhedesu visattā hoti laggā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitā, evaṃ ete kilesā dhammā, tasmā ettha puthupabhedesu vatthukāmesu visattaṃ kilesagahanaṃ.
「若人了知彼,从何因生起,他们遣除彼,请听,夜叉!」意思是:那些众生了知烦恼丛林“从此因生起”,知道它是在渴爱所润泽的有身中生起,便以观见过患等修习所生的智慧之火,令那渴爱干涸,从而驱散、舍弃。夜叉啊,请听我们这样说!「他们渡越此难渡瀑流,未曾渡者,为不再有而渡」:因为凡是驱散烦恼丛林的人,必定在修习圣道;不修习圣道,则不可能驱散烦恼。如此修道的他们,依本有智慧,渡过了那难渡的四种瀑流——欲瀑流等——为了不再有、为了涅槃,渡过了这长时以来,乃至梦中都未曾渡越的瀑流。显示巴利原文
Ye naṃ pajānanti yatonidānaṃ, te naṃ vinodenti suṇohi yakkha. Tassattho – ye sattā naṃ kilesagahanaṃ ‘‘itonidānaṃ esa uppajjatī’’ti jānanti, te naṃ taṇhāsinehasinehite attabhāve uppajjatīti ñatvā taṃ taṇhāsinehaṃ ādīnavānupassanādibhāvanāñāṇagginā visosentā vinodenti pajahanti, evaṃ amhākaṃ bhāsitaṃ suṇohi yakkhāti. Te duttaraṃ oghamimaṃ taranti, atiṇṇapubbaṃ apunabbhavāyāti ye hi saṃkilesagahanaṃ vinodenti, te ekantena maggaṃ bhāventi. Na hi maggabhāvanaṃ vinā kilesavinodanaṃ atthi. Evaṃ maggaṃ bhāventā te pakatiñāṇena duttaraṃ kāmoghādiṃ catubbidhaṃ oghaṃ iminā dīghena addhunā supinantenapi atiṇṇapubbaṃ anatikkantapubbaṃ apunabbhavāya nibbānāya taranti.
「难行,世尊!」:据说有一位天子,过去曾为修行者,因烦恼极重,以相应的精进镇伏烦恼,修习了沙门法,但由于过去善根薄弱,未能证得圣位便命终,转生天界。他来到如来面前,陈述此难行之状,而如此说。此处的“难行”是指:在十年乃至六十年间,恒时修习完全清净的沙门法,是为难行。“有学”指七有学。“戒等持者”指依戒而得等持、具足戒者。“已住立者”指已安住于此种自性者。解答完所问之后,为提出后续问题,便说“趣向非家者”等。其中,“趣向非家者”指已趣向无家、无系缚者,即出家者。“知足”指对四资具的知足。显示巴利原文
Dukkaraṃ bhagavāti eko kira devaputto pubbayogāvacaro bahalakilesatāya sappayogena kilese vikkhambhento samaṇadhammaṃ katvā pubbahetumandatāya ariyabhūmiṃ appatvāva kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatto, so tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamitvā dukkarabhāvaṃ ārocento evamāha. Tattha dukkaranti dasapi vassāni…pe… saṭṭhipi vassāni ekantaparisuddhassa samaṇadhammassa karaṇaṃ nāmetaṃ dukkaraṃ. Sekkhāti satta sekkhā. Sīlasamāhitāti sīlena samāhitā samupetā. Ṭhitattāti patiṭṭhitasabhāvā. Evaṃ pucchitapañhaṃ vissajjitvā uparipañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ‘‘anagāriyupetassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha anagāriyupetassāti anagāriyaṃ niggehabhāvaṃ upagatassa, pabbajitassāti attho. Tuṭṭhīti catupaccayasantoso.
「以修习」:指修习心的寂止。「他们断除死魔之网」:那些日夜乐求诸根调伏的人,能令难以安定的心得定。那些心得定者,圆满对四资具的知足,故不感疲惫。那些知足者,圆满于戒,故不感疲惫。那些安住于戒的七有学圣者,断除名为死魔之网的烦恼网,而后前行。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanāyāti cittavūpasamabhāvanāya. Te chetvā maccuno jālanti ye rattindivaṃ indriyūpasame ratā, te dussamādahaṃ cittaṃ samādahanti. Ye samāhitacittā, te catupaccayasantosaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye santuṭṭhā, te sīlaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye sīle patiṭṭhitā satta sekkhā, te ariyā maccuno jālasaṅkhātaṃ kilesajālaṃ chinditvā gacchanti.
「难行」:确实如此,尊者!那些乐于调伏诸根的人,能够使难以安定的心得定。那些心得定的人,对四资具圆满知足,因此不会疲惫。那些知足的人,圆满戒,不会疲惫。那些以戒为最上执持的七类有学圣者,断除了名为死魔之网的烦恼网,进而前行。怎能不行呢?然而,这难行道,他说为「世尊,是不平坦道」。实际上,圣道本身既不难行也不不平坦,只是它的前行道障碍众多,所以才这样描述。「头向下者」:指那些智慧之首朝下而坠落的人。由于无力登上圣道,他们被说成是从道上坠落。「圣者们的是平等之道」:那正是圣者们所行的平等之道。「不平中为平等」:即使在不平坦的众生当中,他们也确实是平等的。显示巴利原文
Duggamoti saccametaṃ, bhante, ye indriyūpasame ratā, te dussamādahaṃ cittaṃ samādahanti. Ye samāhitacittā, te catupaccayasantosaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye santuṭṭhā, te sīlaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye sīle paramaggāhino satta sekkhā, te ariyā maccuno jālasaṅkhātaṃ kilesajālaṃ chinditvā gacchanti. Kiṃ na gamissanti, ayaṃ pana duggamo ‘‘bhagavāvisamo maggo’’ti āha. Tattha kiñcāpi ariyamaggo neva duggamo na visamo, pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya panassa bahū parissayā honti, tasmā evaṃ vutto. Avaṃsirāti ñāṇasirena adhosirā hutvā papatanti. Ariyamaggaṃ ārohituṃ asamatthatāya eva te magge papatantīti vuccanti. Ariyānaṃ samo maggoti sveva maggo ariyānaṃ samo hoti. Visame samāti visamepi sattakāye samā eva.
「此是那祇园」:给孤独天子前来,为了称赞祇园及佛陀等,而这样说。「仙众所依止」:是比丘僧团所居住的地方。如此以第一偈颂称赞祇园后,现在为称赞圣道,而说「业、明、法、戒、最上活命」。其中,「业」指道思,「明」指道慧,「法」指定,或与定相应的诸法。「戒、活命为最上」显示立于戒者的活命也是最上的。或者另一种解释:「明」指正见、正思惟;「法」指正精进、正念、正定;「戒」指正语、正业、正命;「活命为最上」指在此戒中安立者的活命,才称为最上。「依此,人得以清净」:依此八支圣道,众生得以清净。显示巴利原文
Idañhi taṃ jetavananti anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto jetavanassa ceva buddhādīnañca vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ āgantvā evamāha. Isisaṅghanisevitanti bhikkhusaṅghanivesitaṃ. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya jetavanassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā idāni ariyamaggassa vaṇṇaṃ kathento ‘‘kammaṃ vijjā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kammanti maggacetanā. Vijjāti maggapaññā. Dhammoti samādhi, samādhipakkhikā vā dhammā. Sīlaṃ jīvitamuttamanti sīle patiṭṭhitassa jīvitañca uttamanti dasseti. Atha vā vijjāti diṭṭhisaṅkappā. Dhammoti vāyāmasatisamādhayo. Sīlanti vācākammantājīvā. Jīvitamuttamanti etasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitassa jīvitaṃ nāma uttamanti. ‘‘Etena maccā sujjhantī’’ti etena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena sattā visujjhanti.
“是故”:意为依圣道而得清净,非由种姓或财富,故说“是故”。“当如理地抉择法”:应以如理方便抉择菩提分法。“如是,于此处清净”:即如此于彼圣道中清净。另一种解释:“当如理地抉择法”指以如理方便抉择圣谛法;“如是,于此处清净”指如此于四圣谛中清净。其次,为称赞舍利弗长老而说“唯舍利弗”等。其中,以决定语说“唯舍利弗”,意为:以智慧、寂止等功德而言,唯舍利弗最为殊胜。“以寂止”:指以烦恼之寂止。“到彼岸”:指已达涅槃的比丘。任何已证涅槃的比丘,皆不能如他一般。长老说,以此为最上,无有更高、更上的声闻弟子。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā maggena sujjhanti, na gottadhanehi, tasmā. Yoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena bodhipakkhiyadhammaṃ vicineyya. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tasmiṃ ariyamagge visujjhati. Atha vā yoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena ariyasaccadhammaṃ vicineyya. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tesu catūsu ariyasaccesu visujjhati. Idāni sāriputtattherassa vaṇṇaṃ kathento ‘‘sāriputtovā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāriputtovāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, etehi paññādīhi sāriputtova seyyoti vadati. Upasamenāti kilesavūpasamena. Pāraṅgatoti nibbānaṃ gato, yo koci nibbānapatto bhikkhu, na tādiso. Etāvaparamo siyā, na therā uttaritaro nāma sāvako atthīti vadati.
“过去者”:指过去的五蕴。“不应随念”:不应以渴爱、邪见追随。“不应期望”:不应以渴爱、邪见期求。“因为过去者”:此表原因——凡是过去者,已断、已灭、已消逝,故不应随之而行;凡是未来、尚未到来者,未得、未生、未现起,故亦不应期望。“于处处”:对于现在生起的诸法,在其所生之处,即于彼处以无常随观等七种随观而观察;或于阿兰若等处,处处观察。“不可动摇、不可破坏”:为说明观与反观而说。因为观不被贪等烦恼所动摇、所破坏,故不可动摇、不可破坏;应当增修、增长之,此即反观。或另一种解释:涅槃不被贪等所动摇、所破坏,故不可动摇、不可破坏;有智贤善比丘应当增修,即数数以涅槃为所缘而入果等至,令之增长。显示巴利原文
Atītanti atīte pañcakkhandhe. Nānvāgameyyāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi nānugaccheyya. Nappaṭikaṅkheti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi na pattheyya. Yadatītanti idamettha kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā yaṃ atītaṃ, taṃpahīnaṃ niruddhaṃ atthaṅgataṃ, tasmā taṃ nānugaccheyya. Yasmā ca yaṃ tattha anāgataṃ, taṃ appattaṃ ajātaṃ anibbattaṃ, tasmā tampi na pattheyya. Tattha tatthāti paccuppannampi dhammaṃ yattha yattheva so uppanno, tattha tattheva naṃ aniccānupassanādīhi sattahi anupassanāhi vipassati, araññādīsu vā tattha tattha vipassati. Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppanti idaṃ vipassanāpaṭivipassanādassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Vipassanā hi rāgādīhi na saṃhirati na kuppatīti asaṃhīrā asaṃkuppā, taṃ anubrūhaye vaḍḍheyya paṭivipasseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā nibbānaṃ rāgādīhi na saṃhirati na kuppatīti asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā paṇḍito bhikkhu anubrūhaye, punappunaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appento vaḍḍheyyāti attho.
然而,为了这种修习的缘故,今日即应作务,也就是说,以对烦恼的炽燃、烤燃而得名为“热勤”的精进力,今日就应当实行。「谁知死亡在明日」:明天是生还是死,谁能知道。今日我当布施,或当护戒,或当修某种善法,不要生起“今日还有戏论,明日或后日再了知”这样的心,而应展示出“今日即应作”这样的精进力。「与大军」:因为毒蛇、蝎子、毒药、刀剑等无数死亡之因,就是死魔的大军。以这样具备大军的形式存在的死,想要以“且等几日,等我做完供佛等自己应作之业”这种属于亲交朋友之类的方式,或以“取这百钱或千钱,再等几日”这种属于给与贿赂的方式,或以“我将用这股力量之众来抵挡”这种属于聚集力量大众的方式——都与死魔没有交涉。所谓“交涉”,就是交友、送贿、集众这些名称,因此这样说这个意思。「不怠惰」指不懒惰、勤奋。由于这样行道的人就是一夜贤善者,所以称为「一夜贤善者」。如此,对于这样行道的人,远离贪等相续的寂静佛陀宣说:“此是一夜贤善者”。显示巴利原文
Tassa pana anubrūhanassa atthāya ajjeva kiccamātappanti kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanena ‘‘ātappa’’nti laddhanāmaṃ vīriyaṃ ajjeva kātabbaṃ. Ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suveti sve jīvitaṃ vā maraṇaṃ vā ko jānāti. Ajjeva dānaṃ dassāmi, sīlaṃ vā rakkhissāmi, aññataraṃ vā pana kusalaṃ karissāmi, ‘‘ajja tāva papañco atthi, sve vā punadivase vā jānissāmī’’ti cittaṃ anuppādetvā ‘‘ajjeva karissāmī’’ti evaṃ vīriyaṃ kātabbanti dasseti. Mahāsenenāti ahivicchikavisasatthādīni hi anekāni maraṇakāraṇāni tassa senāti tāya mahatiyā senāya vasena mahāsenena evarūpena maccunā saddhiṃ ‘‘katipāhaṃ tāva āgamehi, yāvāhaṃ buddhapūjādiṃ attano avassayaṃ kammaṃ karomī’’ti evaṃ mittasanthavākārasaṅkhāto vā ‘‘idaṃ sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā gahetvā katipāhaṃ āgamehī’’ti evaṃ lañjānuppadānasaṅkhāto vā ‘‘iminā balarāsinā paṭibāhissāmī’’ti evaṃ balarāsisaṅkhāto vā saṅgaro natthi. Saṅgaroti hi mittakaraṇalañjadānabalarāsisaṅkaḍḍhanānaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmā ayamattho vutto. Atanditanti analasaṃ uṭṭhāhakaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipannattā bhaddo ekaratto assāti bhaddekaratto. Itīti evaṃ paṭipannaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘bhaddekaratto aya’’nti rāgādisantatāya santo buddhamuni ācikkhati.
「以眼与慧」:即由眼与慧,或由那成为眼的慧。「以念与慧」:即由念与慧,或由以念为殊胜的慧。「以身」:指名身。显示巴利原文
Cakkhunā paññāya cāti cakkhunā ca paññāya ca. Cakkhubhūtāya vā paññāya. Satiyā paññāya cāti satiyā ca paññāya ca, sativisiṭṭhāya vā paññāya. Kāyenāti nāmakāyena.
「天眼极清净」:即天眼极为清净,意为他所亲证。「宿住」:指过去生中所住过的诸蕴。「神变种类」:即种种神通类别。「灭」:即涅槃。其余皆易解。显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhusuvisuddhanti dibbaṃ cakkhu suvisuddhaṃ, yaṃ sacchikarotīti adhippāyo. Pubbenivāsāti purimāsu jātīsu nivutthakkhandhā. Iddhividhāti iddhikoṭṭhāsā. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
「其心如石」:犹如一整块坚石不被寻常之风所吹动,其心亦不被世间法之风所动摇,故说其心如石。由此而说“安住不动摇”。「于可染著处」:指于利得等可染著之境。「于可忿怒处」:指于不得等可忿怒之境。「如是之苦又从何而来」:如此已修心、超越世间法的无上士,即不会被世间法所引生的苦所追随。显示巴利原文
Yassaselūpamaṃ cittanti ekaghanaṃ selaṃ viya pakativātehi lokadhammavātehi akampanīyato yassa cittaṃ selūpamaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘ṭhitaṃ nānupakampatī’’ti. Rajanīyesūti lābhādīsu. Kopaneyyeti alābhādike. Kuto naṃ dukkhamessatīti taṃ evaṃ bhāvitacittaṃ vītikkantalokadhammaṃ uttamapurisaṃ lokadhammahetukaṃ dukkhaṃ nānugamissati.
「彼为婆罗门」:因已舍离种种罪恶法故,是为婆罗门;非如那些依凭吉兆等,具足“吽吽”声等烦恼恶法而唯以出身便自称婆罗门者。这样的婆罗门,由于已舍离罪恶法,由断除“吽吽”声而为无“吽吽”者;由于无贪等烦恼而为无烦恼者;因依戒律防护而调伏其心,故为已调御者。他以四道智为诸明,抵达涅槃之边际,或谓抵达一切明之边际,故为明具足者;由于道上梵行已圆满,故为已住梵行者。他依法宣说梵论:他宣说“我是婆罗门”这样的言论。于一切世间众生所居处,于任何所缘,彼皆绝无贪之增盛、嗔之增盛、痴之增盛、慢之增盛、见之增盛——即全然无有这些增盛。显示巴利原文
Yo brāhmaṇoti bāhitapāpadhammatāya brāhmaṇo, na diṭṭhamaṅgalikatāya huṃhuṅkārakasāvādipāpadhammayutto hutvā kevalaṃ jātimattena brāhmaṇoti paṭijānāti. So brāhmaṇo bāhitapāpadhammattā huṃhuṅkārappahānena nihuṃhuṅko. Rāgādikasāvābhāvena nikkabhāvo. Sīlasaṃvarena saṃyatacittatāya yatatto. Catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehi antaṃ nibbānaṃ, vedānaṃ vā antaṃ gatattā vedantagū. Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā vūsitabrahmacariyo. Dhammena so brahmavādaṃ vadeyyāti so ‘‘brāhmaṇo aha’’nti etaṃ vādaṃ vadeyya. Yassa sakalalokasannivāse kuhiñci ekārammaṇepi rāgussado dosussado mohussado mānussado diṭṭhussadoti ime ussadā natthīti attho.
「无有住著」:即不执取、不停滞。「善星」:指名为善星的星宿。若彼处无日月等光明,便当唯有黑暗——为遮此疑,故说“彼处无有黑暗”。而「当由自证了知时」等:如此之涅槃,当以亲证之智证知时,他便从色法、无色法以及苦与乐中得解脱。显示巴利原文
Na gādhatīti na patiṭṭhahati. Sukkāti sukkasaṅkhātā gahā. Yadi candimasūriyādīnaṃ pabhā tattha natthi, tamo eva ca siyāti āsaṅkamāne sandhāyāha ‘‘tamo tattha na vijjatī’’ti. Yadā ca attanāvedītiādīsu evaṃvidhaṃ nibbānaṃ attapaccakkhena ñāṇena yadā vindati, atha rūpārūpadhammato sukhadukkhato ca vippamutto hotīti.
「于自己的诸法」:指对于称为“自己有身”的取蕴。通常修习内观时,心的安住大多集中于此。「这是毗舍遮」:阿迦拉帕卡,这是你所说的毗舍遮,也就是烦恼毗舍遮。「乱」:是你所造成的混乱,即制造混乱。「超越」:指越过。显示巴利原文
Sakesu dhammesūti sakaattabhāvasaṅkhātesu upādānakkhandhesu. Yebhuyyena hi ajjhattaṃ vipassanābhiniveso hotīti. Etaṃ pisācanti ajakalāpaka, etaṃ tayā vuttaṃ pisācaṃ kilesapisācañca. Pakkulanti tayā kataṃ akkulaṃ pakkulakaraṇañca. Ativattatīti atikkamati.
「不欣喜来的人」:指对于前妻或其他来的人,心中不欢喜、不接纳;对于她的离去也不忧愁。「从结缚中解脱的僧伽玛吉比丘」:指从五种结缚中解脱的僧伽玛吉比丘。显示巴利原文
Nābhinandatiāyantinti purāṇadutiyikaṃ āgacchantiṃ aññaṃ vā na abhinandati cittena na sampaṭicchati. Tameva pakkamantiṃ na socati. Saṅgā saṅgāmajiṃ muttanti pañcavidhāpi saṅgato muttaṃ saṅgāmajiṃ bhikkhuṃ.
「很多人在这里」:意思是很多人在这里沐浴,但并非因此就成了清净。显示巴利原文
Bahvetthāti bahu ettha nhāyati jano, na tena so suddho nāma hotīti adhippāyo.
“遮止种姓之力”:指能遮止种姓之力。“实为伴侣”:由于他们一同修习止与观,故称为伴侣。“长夜合会者”:因为时常听闻适宜之法而长久相伴,故称长夜合会者。“起懈”:即发起松懈的精进,也就是变得懈怠。显示巴利原文
Jātibalaṃnisedhanti jātibalassa nisedhakaṃ. Sahāyā vatāti samathavipassanābhāvanāya saha ayanavasena sahāyā vata. Kālena kālaṃ sappāyadhammassa savanavasena cirarattaṃ sameti samāgamo etesanti cirarattasametikā. Sithilamārabbhāti sithilaṃ vīriyaṃ katvā.
“比丘们,于此,有何差别”:这是为了表明,导师与声闻两者同样对五取蕴生起厌离等,无论在前分修行还是无取解脱中,皆无高下差别。正如经中所说:“解脱没有差别。”此处以反问“有何差别”指出没有差别。“精勤”:指额外的精进。“差异”:即差别。显示巴利原文
Tatra kho, bhikkhave, ko visesoti satthu sāvakassa ca pañcasveva upādānakkhandhesu nibbidādayoti pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyaṃ anupādāvimuttiyañca heṭṭhā upari ca visesābhāvaṃ dasseti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘natthi vimuttiyā nānatta’’nti (a. ni. 5.31; kathā. 355 atthato samānaṃ). Tattha visesābhāvaṃ paccāmasati ‘‘tatra ko viseso’’ti. Adhippayāsoti adhikapayogo. Nānākaraṇanti ca visesoyeva vutto.
“比丘们,这就是差别”:比丘们,虽然在解脱上弟子与导师并无差别,然而正自觉者凭借自然智断尽了一切烦恼与习气、证悟正自觉之后,能在其他众生的相续中令未生的圣道生起等,具足一切知的一切功德。这便是正自觉者与慧解脱者的差别所在。其中,“未生起的”:指尚未存在的。因为迦叶正自觉者曾令圣道生起,在此期间并没有其他导师能令它生起,所以这位世尊被称为“令未生之道生起的人”。“未曾生的”:是它的同义词。“未宣说的”:指从未被宣说过的。“知道道”,故为“道知者”;“使道被了知、令道显明”,故为“道明知者”;“于道与非道皆善巧”,故为“道善巧者”。“随道而行者”:指那些追随此道而行的人。“随后具备者”:我(佛陀)是最先具备此道的人,弟子们是后来才具备的。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kho, bhikkhave, visesoti bhikkhave, yadipi sāvakassa satthu ca vimuttiyaṃ viseso natthi, sayambhuñāṇena pana savāsanasabbakilese khepetvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā anuppannassa ariyamaggassa parasantāne uppādanādisakalasabbaññuguṇasamāyogo. Ayaṃ sammāsambuddhassa paññāvimuttato visesoti. Tattha anuppannassāti avattamānassa. Ariyamaggañhi kassapasammāsambuddho uppādesi. Antarā añño satthā uppādetā nāma nāhosi, tasmā ayaṃ bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā nāma. Asañjātassāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anakkhātassāti akathitassa. Maggaṃ jānātīti maggaññū. Maggaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ akāsīti maggavidū. Magge ca amagge ca kovidoti maggakovido. Maggānugāti maggaṃ anugacchantā. Pacchāsamannāgatāti ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ samannāgato, sāvakā pacchā samannāgatā.
“黑暗”:因与那些黑暗状态相应,故称为黑暗。“以黑暗为归宿”:由于造作身恶行等,之后会趣向地狱的黑暗,故称为以黑暗为归宿。这样,两方面所说的都是与蕴的黑暗有关。“光明”:因与光明相契合,故称为光明,也就是成为光明的意思。“以光明为归宿”:由于身善行等,之后会趣向天界、趣向善趣,故称为以光明为归宿。依此道理,其余两类人也应当被理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nīce kule paccājāto’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.85; pu. pa. 168) tamena yuttoti tamo. Kāyaduccaritādīhi puna nirayatamupagamanato tamaparāyaṇo. Iti ubhayenapi khandhatamova kathito hoti. ‘‘Aḍḍhe kule paccājāto’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.85; pu. pa. 168) jotinā yuttoti joti, ālokabhūtoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyasucaritādīhi puna saggūpapattibhavūpagamanato jotiparāyaṇo. Iminā nayena itarepi dve veditabbā.
“智者不称此为坚固的束缚”:此处的“智者”是指佛陀等具智慧者。对于用铁制成的锁链、用木制成的脚镣,以及用芦苇、草等编成的绳索,由于可用刀剑等将其砍断,智者并不称之为坚固——这是此句的含义。“极贪著之人”:是指一再染著、被强盛的贪欲所束缚之人。“于宝石与耳环上”:是指对于宝石与耳环,或对于镶嵌宝石的耳环。“此是坚固的”:那些对宝石与耳环极度贪染的人,由此而生起对这些物品的欲贪,以及对儿女、妻子的渴爱与牵挂,这种由烦恼所结成的束缚,具智慧者才称之为坚固。显示巴利原文
Na taṃ daḷhaṃ bandhanamāhu dhīrāti ettha dhīrāti buddhādayo paṇḍitapurisā. Yaṃ saṅkhalikasaṅkhātaṃ ayena nibbattaṃ āyasaṃ addubandhanasaṅkhātaṃ dārumayañca pabbajatiṇehi rajjuṃ katvā katarajjubandhanañca, taṃ asiādīhi chindituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘thira’’nti na vadantīti attho. Sārattarattāti rattā hutvā rattā. Balavarāgarattāti attho. Maṇikuṇḍalesūti maṇīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca, maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu. Etaṃ daḷhanti ye maṇikuṇḍalesu sārattarattā, tesu yo rāgo, yā ca puttadāresu apekkhā taṇhā, etaṃ kilesamayaṃ bandhanaṃ paṇḍitapurisā ‘‘daḷha’’nti vadanti.
“拖下”:因为它将人拖拽而令其堕入四恶趣,向下牵拉、往下拖拽,故称拖下。“松弛”:指这种束缚在捆绑处不损伤皮肤等,也不让人察觉束缚的存在,允许人在水路、陆路等处继续劳作,故称松弛。“难解脱”:因为即使由贪欲之力仅生起一次的烦恼束缚,也如同乌龟咬住东西一般难以拉开、难以解脱,故称难解脱。“亦断此已”:意思是,以智慧之剑斩断这坚固的烦恼束缚之后,成为无所期待之人,舍弃欲乐,出家、离去、修行。显示巴利原文
Ohārinanti ākaḍḍhitvā catūsu apāyesu pātanato avaharati heṭṭhā haratīti ohārinaṃ. Sithilanti bandhanaṭṭhāne chaviādīni akopetvā bandhanabhāvampi ajānāpetvā jalapathathalapathādīsu kammaṃ kātuṃ detīti sithilaṃ. Duppamuñcanti lobhavasena hi ekavārampi uppannaṃ kilesabandhanaṃ daṭṭhaṭṭhānato kacchapo viya dummocayaṃ hotīti duppamuñcaṃ. Etampi chetvānāti etaṃ daḷhampi kilesabandhanaṃ ñāṇakhaggena chinditvā anapekkhino hutvā kāmasukhaṃ pahāya paribbajanti pakkamanti pabbajanti cāti attho.
“思惟”指依不善思心所而思惟。“筹划”指此不善思心所以导向身业与语业的方式进行谋划。“随眠”指贪等随眠本身未被断除而潜伏于相续中。“这成为识安住的所缘”指此思惟、筹划与随眠,成为行作识安住与转起的条件。“在所缘存在时,识便有了立足处”指当所述条件存在时,行作识通过完成速行、造业而具有牵引结生的能力,识便有了立足处。“未来会有后有的再生”指于未来,称为后有的识等名色会再次生起。显示巴利原文
Cetetīti akusalacetanāvasena ceteti. Pakappetīti tameva akusalacetanaṃ kāyavacīkammabhāvaṃ pāpanavasena kappeti. Anusetīti rāgādianusayova santāne appahīnabhāvena anuseti. Ārammaṇametaṃ hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyāti yadetaṃ cetanaṃ pakappanaṃ anusayanañca, etaṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa ṭhitiyā pavattiyā paccayo hotīti attho. Ārammaṇe sati patiṭṭhā viññāṇassa hotīti yathāvuttapaccaye sati abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāsampādanato patiṭṭhā hoti. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti āyatiṃ punabbhavasaṅkhātā viññāṇādīnaṃ abhinibbatti hoti.
“比丘们,如果不思惟”等文是否定不善业。此处简略的意思是:即使有时由于如理作意而不起不善思心所,但随眠仍未断除,它们依然会成为善行作识的立足处。而行作识存在,未来便会有后有的再生,这完全可以成立。第三种情况应依与上述相反的道理来理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘No ce, bhikkhave, cetetī’’tiādinā akusalakammameva paṭikkhipati. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho, yadipi kadāci yonisomanasikārā akusalacetanā nappavattati, anusayā pana appahīnāti, te kusalassa abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa patiṭṭhā honti yevāti. Sati ca abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇe āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Tatiyavāro vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.
“诸比丘,这在圣者之律中不是大海”等语,乃是为了显示:若因“难以填满”、“令人沉没”、“难以超越”等义而称海洋为“海”,那么,较之于此,于眼等处更有百倍、千倍可适用此理者。故如此说。因而,佛陀说:“诸比丘,眼是人之海,其流为色所成。”意思是:由于有情为种种色所吸引、所攫取,故色处本身即是眼海之流。显示巴利原文
‘‘Neso, bhikkhave, ariyassa vinaye samuddo’’tiādi yadi duppūraṇaṭṭhena saṃsīdanaṭṭhena duratikkamanaṭṭhena sāgaro ‘‘samuddo’’ti vucceyya, tato satabhāgenapi sahassabhāgenapi cakkhuādīsveva ayaṃ nayo labbhatīti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘cakkhu, bhikkhave, purisassa samuddo, tassa rūpamayo vego’’ti, rūpesu sattānaṃ āviñchanato rūpāyatanameva vego cakkhussa vegoti attho.
“能克服彼色所成之流者”:谓有比丘,连同所缘,观眼为无常、苦、无我,并于彼处厌离、离贪,从与之相关的烦恼网中解脱出来,从而征服、超克它。诸比丘,此人即被称为“已渡眼之海者”——意即,这位比丘已渡越了名为眼的海。显示巴利原文
Yo taṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ sahatīti yo bhikkhu saha visayena cakkhuṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato sammasanto tattha ca nibbindanto virajjanto tappaṭibaddhato kilesajālato vimuccanto abhibhavati. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, atari cakkhusamuddanti ayaṃ bhikkhu cakkhusaṅkhātaṃ samuddaṃ tiṇṇoti vuccati.
另一种解释是:“比丘们,在圣者的律中,眼是海”——如果因为难以填满的含义,或者因为“汇集”的含义而称为海,那么眼本身就是海。因为对于眼来说,从大地直到阿迦腻吒梵天界,它所摄入的青、黄等所缘,都不能让它达到满足的状态。如此,眼也以“难以填满”之义而成为海。再者,眼在那些青、黄等所缘上“汇集而起”,不防护地、流入地运行,成为烦恼生起的原因,以有过患的状态进行,所以也以“汇集”之义而成为海。同样,眼作为贪欲之流等生起的门户,以它们让相续“汇集”、浸染的含义,而成为海。它具有色所成之流:就像大海有无量的波浪所成之流一样,对于这个眼之海,根据所摄入的青、黄等不同类别的所缘,应当知道也有不可测量的色所成之流。「能克服彼色所成之流者」:指对于这个在眼之海中汇集的色所成之流——面对可意的色法生起贪,面对不可意的色法生起瞋,面对中等所缘境生起痴——他以舍心的状态,让这些贪等烦恼都不生起,从而克服它。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – cakkhu, bhikkhave, ariyassa vinaye samuddoti yadipi duppūraṇaṭṭhena yadi vā samudanaṭṭhena samuddo, cakkhumeva samuddo. Tassa hi pathavito yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā nīlādiārammaṇaṃ samosarantaṃ paripuṇṇabhāvaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Evaṃ duppūraṇaṭṭhenapi samuddo. Cakkhu ca tesu tesu nīlādiārammaṇesu samudeti asaṃvutaṃ hutvā osaramānaṃ kilesuppattiyā kāraṇabhāvena sadosabhāvena gacchatīti samudanaṭṭhenapi samuddo. Tathā cakkhuṃ taṇhāsotādīnaṃ uppattidvāratāya tehi santānassa samudanaṭṭhena temanaṭṭhena samuddo. Tassa rūpamayo vegoti samuddassa appamāṇo ūmimayo vego viya tassāpi cakkhusamuddassa samosarantassa nīlādibhedassa ārammaṇassa vasena appameyyo rūpamayo vego veditabbo. Yo taṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ sahatīti yo taṃ cakkhusamudde samosarantaṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ manāpe rūpe rāgaṃ, amanāpe dosaṃ, asamapekkhane mohanti evaṃ rāgādikilese anuppādento upekkhakabhāvena sahati.
“有波浪的”等语中,因具烦恼波浪,故称“有波浪的”;因具烦恼漩涡,故称“有漩涡的”;因具烦恼鳄鱼,故称“有鳄鱼的”;因具烦恼罗刹,故称“有罗刹的”。或以忿怒与忧恼之力而称“有波浪的”;以五欲之力而称“有漩涡的”;以女人为因而称“有鳄鱼的、有罗刹的”。正如经中所说:“比丘们,‘波浪之怖畏’是忿怒与忧恼的同义语。同样,比丘们,‘漩涡’是五欲的同义语。比丘们,‘鳄鱼、罗刹’是女人的同义语。”其余眼、耳、鼻、舌、身处也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Saūmintiādīsu kilesaūmīhi saūmiṃ. Kilesavaṭṭehi sāvaṭṭaṃ. Kilesagahehi sagahaṃ. Kilesarakkhasehi sarakkhasaṃ. Kodhupāyāsassa vā vasena saūmiṃ. Kāmaguṇavasena sāvaṭṭaṃ. Mātugāmavasena sagahaṃ sarakkhasaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘ūmibhayanti kho, bhikkhave, kodhupāyāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.162; a. ni. 4.122). Tathā āvaṭṭanti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.164; a. ni. 4.122). Gaharakkhasoti kho, bhikkhave, mātugāmassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109). Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo.
“渡越有波涛之怖畏、难渡者”,即渡越了因无常等波浪之怖畏而令人生畏、极难超越的境地,亦即已超越之;“已至世间边际者”,即已到达轮回世间的边际;“被称为到彼岸者”,即被宣说为已至涅槃之人。显示巴利原文
Saūmibhayaṃduttaraṃ accatarīti aniccatādiūmibhayena sabhayaṃ duratikkamaṃ atikkami. Lokantagūti saṃsāralokassa antaṃ gato. Pāragatoti vuccatīti nibbānaṃ gatoti kathīyati.
“渔钩”:因其为众生招致无义,如同渔钩一样,故称渔钩。“为不幸”意为为无义。“为恼害”意为为苦。“可爱的”:无论已遍求或未遍求,因其是令人快乐的所缘,所以是可爱的。以可意之义,称为“令人愉悦的”;以令心增长之义,称为“可意的”;以可爱之自性,称为“可爱之形色”。因与烦恼欲共俱,称为“与欲相关的”;以能生贪、令心染着之义,称为“能染的”。“若于此”指对于那色所缘:色处虽然依青、黄等分为多种差别,但以色所缘的状态与眼所识的状态来看,并不超越单一性,因此取其自性共通之处而说“若于此”。“欢喜”意为以成为欢喜、伴有喜悦的渴爱当面感到欢喜。“迎赞”意为以“啊!快乐啊!啊!快乐啊!”这样的方式令其宣说,依渴爱的方式表示迎赞。“耽着而住”意为吞没、令其完全确定之后而安住其中。比丘们,这位比丘被称为已吞下魔之渔钩者,意思是:比丘们,这位比丘吞下了成为烦恼魔之渔钩的色爱而安住其中,故如此说。其余诸处(耳、鼻、舌、身、意)也应当以这种方式了知含义。“全破”意为破。显示巴利原文
Baḷisāti sattānaṃ anatthahetutāya baḷisā viya baḷisā. Anayāyāti anatthāya. Byābādhāyāti dukkhāya. Iṭṭhāti pariyiṭṭhā vā apariyiṭṭhā vā sukhārammaṇatāya iṭṭhā. Kāmanīyaṭṭhena kantā. Manassa vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena manāpā. Piyasabhāvatāya piyarūpā. Kilesakāmasahitattā kāmūpasaṃhitā. Rāgajananaṭṭhena cittassa rañjanato rajanīyā. Tañceti taṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ, nīlādivasena anekabhedabhinnampi hi rūpāyatanaṃ rūpārammaṇabhāvena cakkhuviññeyyabhāvena ca ekavidhataṃ nātivattatīti taṃsabhāvasāmaññaṃ gahetvā ‘‘tañce’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhinandatīti abhinandanabhūtāya sappītikataṇhāya abhimukho nandati. Abhivadatīti ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’nti vadāpentiyā taṇhāyanavasena abhivadati. Ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā tiṭṭhati. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gilitabaḷiso mārassāti ayaṃ, bhikkhu, kilesamārassa baḷisabhūtaṃ rūpataṇhaṃ gilitvā ṭhitoti vuccati. Sesavāresupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Abhedīti bhindi. Paribhedīti sabbabhāgena bhindi. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
“此世间为热恼所生”:此有情世间生来便带有热恼,意为因亲属离散等所生的愁苦热恼,以及因贪等所生的燃烧热恼。“为触所制”:被众多苦触所征服。“号泣而说自苦”:由于未修身,无法忍受自己触到的种种苦,便悲泣地说道:“苦啊!这样的苦,连我的敌人也不要遭遇!”如此种种。这是什么缘故呢?“彼以任何方式思量,此即变为他样”:这些有情无论以何种方式思量、期望对治自己的苦,那苦却需要以另一种方式来治疗;或者以任何方式思量自己的增长,却变为他样,反而不能增长。如此,因为变为他样,便遭遇了愿求的破坏。此执着于有的众生,在诸欲有等有中执着,这便是有情世间;即便如此,他们仍然只欢喜有,而不厌离。“彼所欢喜者,即是怖畏”:凡是欢喜欲有等有的,那便是怖畏,因为它伴随着老死等众多灾祸,以极恐怖的内涵而成为怖畏。“彼所畏惧者,即是苦”:凡是畏惧老死等处的,那便是苦,因为那是苦的安立处,且属于苦苦。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ loko santāpajātoti ayaṃ sattaloko jātasantāpo ñātibyasanādivasena uppannasokasantāpo ca rāgādivasena uppannapariḷāhasantāpo cāti attho. Phassaparetoti anekehi dukkhaphassehi abhibhūto. Rodaṃ vadati attatoti taṃ taṃ attanā phuṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ abhāvitakāyatāya adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto ‘‘aho dukkhaṃ, īdisaṃ dukkhaṃ mayhaṃ sattunopi mā hotū’’tiādinā vilapanto vadati. Kasmā? Yena yena hi maññanti, tato taṃ hoti aññathā, yasmā ete sattā yena yena pakārena attano dukkhassa paṭikāraṃ maññanti āsīsanti, taṃ dukkhaṃ tato aññena pakārena tikicchitabbaṃ hoti. Yena vā pakārena attano vaḍḍhiṃ maññanti, tato aññathā avaḍḍhi eva pana hoti. Evaṃ aññathābhāvitaṃ icchāvighātaṃ eva pāpuṇāti. Ayaṃ bhavasatto kāmādibhavesu satto sattaloko, tathāpi bhavamevābhinandati, na tattha nibbindati. Yadabhinandati taṃ bhayanti yaṃ kāmādibhavaṃ abhinandati, taṃ jarāmaraṇādianekabyasanānubandhattā ativiya bhayānakaṭṭhena bhayaṃ. Yassa bhāyatīti yato jarāmaraṇādito bhāyati, taṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato dukkhadukkhatāya ca dukkhanti.
「为断除有故」:为了舍断有的缘故。「正是」是一个表示决定义的助词。这句话是说:我一定是为了通过舍断诸欲有等有的集来断除有,才修习这已证得的道梵行。显示巴利原文
Bhavavippahānāyāti bhavassa pajahanatthāya. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ekanteneva kāmādibhavassa samudayappahānena pahānatthaṃ idaṃ mayā adhigataṃ maggabrahmacariyaṃ vussatīti.
如此显示了圣道必定导向解脱的性质之后,为驳斥其他道路能导向解脱的主张,世尊宣说了“凡任何”等语。其中,“以有”:指依色界有或无色界有。“从有”:指从轮回。“彻底解脱”:指从有中解脱,即轮回清净之义。虽然那些沙门与婆罗门认为那种境界就是涅槃,但事实上,他们依凭于导向有的业、色界及无色界的禅那,以及由这些禅那引生的再生有,而主张“有清净”;这便是以有而说“从有解脱”。因此世尊说:“我说这些一切,未从有解脱。”或者,另一种解释:“以有”:指有见;因为“有”即是存在、持续、恒常,由于如此转起,常见便被称为“有见”。如同“有爱”等词语,此“有见”省略了后面的词而直说“有”。依于常见,此处有一类人认为某种殊胜的有就是彻底从有解脱。正如梵天巴卡所说:“此是常,此是恒,此是永恒,此是不变易。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ariyassa maggassa ekaṃseneva niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni aññamaggassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipanto ‘‘ye hi kecī’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhavenāti rūpabhavena vā arūpabhavena vā. Bhavassāti saṃsārassa. Vippamokkhanti bhavato vimuttiṃ, saṃsārasuddhinti attho. Kiñcāpi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā tattha nibbānasaññino, bhavagāmikammena pana rūpārūpajjhānena , taṃnibbattena ca upapattibhavena bhavavisuddhiṃ vadantā bhavena bhavavippamokkhaṃ vadanti nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘sabbe te avippamuttā bhavasmāti vadāmī’’ti. Atha vā bhavenāti bhavadiṭṭhiyā, bhavati tiṭṭhati sassatanti hi pavattanato sassatadiṭṭhi ‘‘bhavadiṭṭhī’’ti vuccati. Bhavadiṭṭhi eva uttarapadalopena ‘‘bhavo’’ti vuttā bhavataṇhātiādīsu viya. Bhavadiṭṭhivasena hi idhekacce bhavavisesaṃyeva bhavavippamokkhaṃ maññanti. Yathā taṃ bako brahmā āha – ‘‘idaṃ niccaṃ, idaṃ dhuvaṃ, idaṃ sassataṃ, idaṃ avipariṇāmadhamma’’nti (ma. ni. 1.501; saṃ. ni. 1.175). Vibhavenāti ucchedadiṭṭhiyā. Vibhavati vinassati ucchijjatīti hi pavattanato ucchedadiṭṭhi vuttanayena ‘‘vibhavo’’ti vuccati. Bhavassa nissaraṇamāhaṃsūti saṃsārasuddhiṃ vadiṃsu. Ucchedadiṭṭhivasena hi idhekacce saṃsārasuddhiṃ vadanti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
“贤者,这个我具有色身、由四大所成……乃至……证得非想非非想处而住。贤者,如此,这个我便被彻底、正确地断灭了。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yato kho, bho, ayaṃ attā rūpī cātumahābhūtiko…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṃ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.91).
「未出离者」(Anissaṭāti):就是未出离的人。在这里说出它的原因:「依于取着,此苦才产生」(upadhiñhi paṭicca dukkhamidaṃ sambhotī)。其中,「取着」(upadhinti)指蕴等取着。这是在说什么呢?这些见行者认为那里就是涅槃,但在那里,蕴取着、烦恼取着、行取着都已经被他们证得、知晓了。这怎么可能是苦的出离呢?为了显示究竟义的苦出离,所以这样说:「由一切取的灭尽,就没有苦的产生。」(sabbupādānakkhayā natthi dukkhassa sambhavo)显示巴利原文
Anissaṭāti anikkhantā. Tattha kāraṇamāha – ‘‘upadhiñhi paṭicca dukkhamidaṃ sambhotī’’ti. Tattha upadhinti khandhādiupadhiṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yattha ime diṭṭhigatikā nibbānasaññino, tattha khandhūpadhikilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhayo adhigatā ñātā. Kuto tassa dukkhanissaraṇatāti. Yaṃ pana paramatthato dukkhanissaraṇaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbupādānakkhayā natthi dukkhassa sambhavo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“见此处世间”(Lokamimaṃ passāti):世尊呼唤自己的心。“种种”(Puthūti):各异、各别。“为无明所驱使”(Avijjāya paretanti):被愚痴所征服。“已生起者”(Bhūtanti):指五蕴。“乐着于已生起者”(Bhūtaratanti):指女人对男人,男人对女人,众生如是相互耽溺,因此未能从诸有中解脱。“凡所有诸有”(Ye hi keci bhavāti):无论短寿或长寿、可意或不可意的诸有。“一切处”(Sabbadhīti):上方、下方、四方,即遍一切处。“以一切方式”(Sabbatthatāyāti):以完全周遍的方式。于“彼一切有”(Sabbe te bhavāti)等处,依“一切有皆是无常的”等法,以具足观与无倒之道智作观者,其有爱亦将断尽、止息,不再对非有与断灭生起欢喜与希求;由于一切渴爱皆无余地被道所息灭,涅槃便为寂灭。彼比丘如是寂灭已,因无取——不再执取烦恼与诸行,故无有后有。达此位者,已胜伏五蕴的渴爱束缚。显示巴利原文
Lokamimaṃ passāti bhagavā attano cittaṃ ālapati. Puthūti visuṃ visuṃ. Avijjāya paretanti mohena abhibhūtaṃ. Bhūtanti khandhapañcakaṃ. Bhūtaratanti itthī purise, puriso itthiyāti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ sattesu rataṃ, tato eva bhavā aparimuttā. Ye hi keci bhavāti ittarakhaṇā vā dīghāyukā vā sātavanto vā asātavanto vā bhavā. Sabbadhīti uddhaṃ adho tiriyanti sabbattha. Sabbatthatāyāti sabbabhāvena. Sabbe te bhavātiādīsu ‘‘sabbepi bhavā aniccā’’tiādinā vipassanāsahitāya maggapaññāya aviparītaṃ passato bhavataṇhāpi pahīyati nirujjhati, vibhavaṃ ucchedampi nābhinandati na pattheti, tassa sabba taṇhānaṃ anavasesato maggena nirujjhanato nibbānaṃ nibbuti hoti. Tassa evaṃ nibbutassa bhikkhuno anupādā kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ anupādānato aggahaṇato punabbhavo na hoti. Evaṃbhūtena ca abhibhūto pañcavidhopi māro vijito assa anena mārena saṅgāmo, sabbepi bhave samatikkanto iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīsu tādilakkhaṇappattoti.
“顺流行者”指无闻凡夫;“逆流行者”指善良凡夫;“安住者”指有学圣者;“余者”指无学圣者。显示巴利原文
Anusotagāmī andhaputhujjano paṭisotagāmī kalyāṇaputhujjano. Ṭhitatto sekkho. Itaro asekkho.
「出身」:指种姓。「黑出身」:指生于黑、卑劣家族的人。「生黑法」:造作那十种黑暗的不善法;他如此造作黑法之后,便投生地狱。「白法」:他思惟:“我因过去未造福德,才投生卑劣家族,今当造作福德。”由此造作那称为福德的白净法,并以此投生天界。「非黑非白涅槃」:因为如果涅槃是黑的,就应当给出黑的异熟;若是白的,就应当给出白的异熟;然而涅槃两者俱无,故说“非黑非白”。这里所说的“涅槃”,指的是阿拉汉果。由于此果在烦恼灭尽的边际生起,故称为涅槃。此人即造作、生起此果。「白出身」:指生于白净高贵家族的人。其余内容可依前述方式理解。「黑、黑异熟」等四种业的意义,已于前文义释中分别。显示巴利原文
Abhijātikoti jātiyo. Kaṇhābhijātikoti kaṇhe nīce kule jāto. Kaṇhaṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyatīti kāḷakaṃ dasavidhaṃ dussīladhammaṃ pasavati karoti, so taṃ abhijāyitvā niraye nibbattati. Sukkaṃ dhammanti ‘‘ahaṃ pubbepi puññānaṃ akatattā nīce kule nibbatto, idāni puññaṃ karissāmī’’ti puññasaṅkhātaṃ sukkaṃ paṇḍaraṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyati, so tena sagge nibbattati. Akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ nibbānanti nibbānañhi sace kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya, kaṇhavipākaṃ dadeyya. Sukkaṃ, sukkavipākaṃ dadeyya. Dvinnampi appadānato pana ‘‘akaṇhaṃ asukka’’nti vuttaṃ. Nibbānanti cettha arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tañhi kilesanibbānante jātattā nibbānaṃ nāma. Taṃ esa abhijāyati pasavati karoti. Sukkābhijātikoti sukke ucce kule jāto. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Kaṇhaṃ kaṇhavipāka’’ntiādikassa kammacatukkassa attho heṭṭhā hārasampātavāre vibhatto eva.
111 “顺流而行者”指无闻凡夫,“逆流而行者”指善凡夫,“确立者”指有学,“另一者”指无学。显示巴利原文
111.
「人性」:指人的状态,即人的投生。「两种」:指应做与不应做,唯此二类。这是表明:应做的才应当做,任何不应做的皆不当作。而「善行」等,则是对前述「应做」的具体说明。显示巴利原文
Mānusattanti manussabhāvaṃ, manussayoninti attho. Dveti kiccaṃ akiccameva cāti dve. Kiccāni tveva kattabbāni, na cākiccaṃ kiñci kattabbanti dasseti. Sukiccantiādi ‘‘kicca’’nti vuttānaṃ tesaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ.
“Padhānānī(精勤)”:意为最殊胜、最卓越。在“purimasmiṃ pabbajitesu”一处,用的是处所格,表示领域;在第二句中,则用依格。这里的“涅槃”指阿拉汉果。为什么在此将财物的舍弃与阿拉汉果相提并论呢?是为了显示布施于应供者能得大果报。所谓“以任何事物”(yena yena vā pana vatthunā),指以断见等事物。“ajjhositā(染著)”:指以有贪等而染著。第二句中的“以任何事物”,则指以不死摇动(amarāvikkhepa)等事物。显示巴利原文
Padhānānīti uttamāni visiṭṭhāni. Purimasmiṃ pabbajitesūti visaye bhummaṃ. Dutiye adhikaraṇe. Tattha nibbānanti arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Kasmā panettha āmisapariccāgo arahattena samadhuro niddiṭṭhoti? Dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇāya mahapphalabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Yena yena vā pana vatthunāti ucchedādivatthunā. Ajjhositāti bhavataṇhādivasena ajjhositā. Dutiye yena yena vā pana vatthunāti amarāvikkhepavatthuādinā.
“以这不净的业果”:由于此果报源自不净的身恶行等业,故称为不净、不善的业果。“这产生愚者相”:因为在过去生中具足恶行,便生起了“这是愚者”的标记。“这部经是杂染部分”:如此展现的这部经,即名为杂染部分经(saṃkilesabhāgiya sutta)。显示巴利原文
Imināasubhena kammavipākenāti asubhassa kāyaduccaritādikammassa vipākattā asubhena asivena kammavipākena. Idaṃ bālalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattatīti purimasmiṃ bhave duccaritasamaṅgitāya bālo ayaṃ bhavatīti upalakkhaṇaṃ jāyati. Idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttanti idaṃ evaṃ pavattaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ.
“以这净的”:此处应依照前述方式来理解其含义。其中,“大人相”即智者相。“烦恼地”:指以烦恼为处所,或指烦恼的状态。对于未断随眠的人,当种种缘会合时,贪等便以缠缚的方式现起,这就是“随眠者的缠缚生起”。“被缠缚者即结缚”:被贪等缠缚的心,便称为与欲贪等结缚相应。“结缚者即执取”:与欲贪结等结缚相应的人,便会执取欲取等及不善业。其余各处都很明显易懂。显示巴利原文
Iminā subhenāti ettha vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tattha mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti paṇḍitalakkhaṇaṃ. Kilesabhūmīhīti kilesaṭṭhānehi kilesāvatthāhi vā. Sānusayassa pariyuṭṭhānaṃ jāyatīti appahīnānusayassa paccayasamāyoge rāgādayo pariyuṭṭhānavasena pavattanti. Pariyuṭṭhito saṃyujjatīti yo rāgādīhi pariyuṭṭhitacitto, so kāmarāgādīhi saṃyujjati nāma. Saṃyujjanto upādiyatīti yo kāmarāgasaṃyojanādīhi saṃyutto, so kāmupādānādīni akusalakammāni ca upādiyati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.
如此,以十六种方式,借多部经为例分析教法的分类后,现在为了显示二十八种教法分类——由于这一分类方式亦为根本句所含摄,其中没有任何部分不被它们所涵盖——故为显示应当分别根本句,而以“其中,哪些是十八根本句?”的提问,先举出根本句,再以“世间、出世间”等指出九十二类,加上“称赞”,便总括了二十八种教法分类。这其中,“世间”:指关联于世间,或在世间所知者,称为世间。这里,凡是经中所说为世间义理,那部经就是世间经。出世间经也是如此。若一部经中,部分说世间,部分说出世间,那部经便是世间与出世间。另外,凡是依于有情、以施设有情为门而宣说的,是“依于有情”;纯粹依法而说的是“依于法”;依两者而说,则是“依于有情及依于法”。依此道理,所有处所都应如此理解。而通过赞叹佛等功德的方式所生起的经,名为“称赞”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ soḷasavidhena sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nānāsuttehi udāharaṇavasena vibhajitvā idāni aṭṭhavīsatividhena sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ dassentena yasmā ayampi paṭṭhānavibhāgo mūlapadehi saṅgahito, na imassāpi tehi asaṅgahito padeso atthi, tasmā mūlapadaṃ vibhajitabbatañca dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katame aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā’’ti pucchāya vasena mūlapadāni uddharitvā ‘‘lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’ntiādinā navatikā, thavo cāti aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha lokiyanti loke niyutto, loke vā vidito lokiyo. Idha pana lokiyo attho yasmiṃ sutte vutto, taṃ suttaṃ lokiyaṃ. Tathā lokuttaraṃ. Yasmiṃ pana sutte padesena lokiyo, padesena lokuttaro vutto, taṃ lokiyañca lokuttarañca. Yañca satte adhiṭṭhāya sattapaññattimukhena desitaṃ, taṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammavaseneva desitaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Ubhayavasena desitaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānañca dhammādhiṭṭhānañca. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Buddhādīnaṃ pana guṇābhitthavanavasena pavattaṃ suttaṃ thavo nāma.
这里,“鲜乳”:指当时即刻从母牛乳房流出的温热牛乳。“转变”:即变坏。意思是说:犹如刚从母牛乳房流出的牛乳,在那一刻不会转变、不会变坏、不会变成凝乳,但后来由于加入了酪浆等酸性物,经过一段时间,便会失去原本的状态,变成凝乳。同样地,恶业在造作的当下也不会成熟。若当下成熟,就不会有未来的自性状态,也就无人能够造作恶业了。只要由善业所生的五蕴还在延续,它们便会保护他;当那些蕴毁坏时,恶业便以令其生于恶趣的方式成熟。而在成熟之时,恶业就像火一般追随着愚者。像什么呢?就像被灰覆盖的火炭。犹如被灰覆盖的暗火炭,即使被踩到,由于有灰覆盖,并不会立刻烧起来,但它会先把灰烧热,进而烧灼皮肤等,直至烧到脑髓。同样地,恶业对于造作它的人,在他于第二生或第三生投生地狱等处时,便以燃烧的方式追随他。显示巴利原文
Tattha sajjukhīranti taṅkhaṇaṃyeva dhenuyā thanehi nikkhantaṃ abbhuṇhakhīraṃ. Muccatīti pariṇamati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā dhenuyā thanato nikkhantaṃ khīraṃ taṅkhaṇaṃyeva na muccati na pariṇamati na dadhibhāvaṃ gacchati, takkādiambilasamāyogato pana parato kālantarena pakatiṃ jahati dadhibhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, evamevaṃ pāpakammampi kiriyakkhaṇeyeva na vipaccati. Yadi vipacceyya, nānāgatīnaṃ sabhāvaṭṭhānaṃ siyā, na koci pāpakammaṃ kātuṃ visaheyya. Yāva pana kusalābhinibbattakkhandhā caranti, tāva taṃ te rakkhanti, tesaṃ bhedā apāyesu nibbattāpanavasena vipaccati. Vipaccamānañca ḍahantaṃ bālamanveti, kiṃ viya? Bhasmacchannova pāvako. Yathā hi chārikāya paṭicchanno vītaccitaṅgāro akkantopi chārikāya paṭicchannattā na tāva ḍahati, chārikaṃ pana tāpetvā cammādīni ḍahanavasena yāva matthaluṅgā ḍahanto gacchati, evamevaṃ pāpakammampi yena kataṃ, taṃ bālaṃ dutiye vā tatiye vā attabhāve nirayādīsu nibbattaṃ ḍahantaṃ anugacchatīti.
“若某比丘的感官”(yassindriyāni):其简要义为——若有比丘的六根,如同被娴熟御者善调的良马,已达止息、调伏、不驰逐于外境,他断除了九种慢,住于慢已断除的状态;因已断尽四漏,成无漏者,安住于如来的境界。对于这样的无漏者,连天人也生羡慕,人们亦渴望见闻、亲近他。“于食有念”(āhāre sati):是指若对食物仍有未断的欲贪。显示巴利原文
Yassindriyānīti tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yassa bhikkhuno chekena sārathinā sudantā assā viya cha indriyāni samathaṃ dantabhāvaṃ nibbisevanabhāvaṃ gatāni, tassa navavidhaṃ mānaṃ pahāya ṭhitattā pahīnamānassa catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ abhāvena anāsavassa tādibhāve ṭhitassa tathārūpassa devāpi pihayanti, manussāpi dassanañca āgamanañca patthentiyevāti. Āhāre satīti āhārapaṭibaddhe chandarāge appahīne sati.
113 那里提到的“sajjukhīra”是指从牛乳乳房中即时流出的温鲜奶。“解脱”在此是指(性质的)转变。这是什么意思呢?犹如从牛乳乳房流出的乳汁,在即刻间不会凝固,不会转变,不会成为酪乳;然而随后,当它遇到酸等条件,经历一段时间,便会失去原态,变成酪乳。同样,恶业在造作的当下并不会立刻产生果报。倘若即造即报,则未来种种果报的差别性质便会杂乱,也就无人能去造作恶业了。只要善业所生的五蕴还在相续流转,它们便会守护着恶业;当彼善蕴坏灭后,恶业即导致在恶道中投生而成熟。成熟之时,它便如火一般燃烧着那愚人,随之而去。如何相似呢?犹如为灰所覆的火。就像被灰烬覆盖、尚有余热的炭火,即便有人踏于其上,因灰覆之故,当下并不被烧伤;然而,当灰被加热后,便会一路烧灼下去,穿透皮肤等,乃至烧至脑髓。同样,恶业亦复如是,在第二世或第三世中,令造作恶业的愚人投生于地狱等恶趣,之后如烈火一般,烧灼随逐。显示巴利原文
113.
“以心周遍一切方”(sabbā disā anuparigamma cetasā):即用心遍历一切方所,乃至十方。“亦未获得”(nevajjhagā):即未曾找到。“更可爱”(piyatara):即更为超胜的可爱。“以自己”(attanā):谓从自我出发。因此,“自我对于各各不同的众生而言皆为可爱”:由于不曾发现有比自我更可爱的,所以对于各各不同的众生来说,自我都是最可爱的。正因为如此,“自爱者不应害他,欲求自安乐者”。显示巴利原文
Sabbā disā anuparigamma cetasāti parito dasapi disā cittena anugantvā. Nevajjhagāti neva adhigaccheyya. Piyataranti atisayena piyaṃ. Attanāti attato. Evaṃ piyo puthu attā paresanti evaṃ kassacipi attanā piyatarassa anupalabbhanavasena visuṃ visuṃ paresaṃ sattānaṃ attā piyo. Yasmā ca etadeva, tasmā na hiṃse paraṃ attakāmo attano sukhakāmoti.
“已生”(bhūtā):已出生、已产生。“当生”(bhavissantī):将产生。或者,“已生”指漏尽者,因为他们已舍断“有”,故称为已生。“将去”(gamissantī):将往他世。漏尽者则入无余涅槃。显示巴利原文
Bhūtāti jātā nibbattā. Bhavissantīti nibbattissanti. Bhūtāti vā khīṇāsavā. Te hi pahīnabhavattā bhūtā eva. Gamissantīti paralokaṃ gamissanti. Khīṇāsavā pana anupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ.
“且是可爱者”(piyo ca hoti):因为具足了极为清净的戒成就与极为清净的见成就,他成为可爱、值得敬爱的人。对此,有如是说:显示巴利原文
Piyoca hotīti suparisuddhāya sīlasampattiyā, suparisuddhāya ca diṭṭhisampattiyā samannāgato piyo piyāyitabbo hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“具足戒与见,安住于法,说真实语者,”
凡履行自己应作之业的人,人们便会喜爱他。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sīladassanasampannaṃ , dhammaṭṭhaṃ saccavādinaṃ; Attano kammakubbānaṃ, taṃ jano kurute piya’’nti. (dha. pa. 217);
“尊重”:因应如石伞一般受到敬重,故称为尊重。“应修习者”:因依超人之法而应受人尊敬,故称为应修习者。又,由戒德所成的可爱、可敬等状态,当由是了知。如经中说:“诸比丘,若比丘期望:‘愿同梵行者喜爱我、满意我、尊重我、视我为应修习者’,他便应于戒上圆满成就。”显示巴利原文
Pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukātabbatāya garu. Uttarimanussadhammavasena sambhāvetabbatāya bhāvanīyo. Sīlaguṇena vā piyagaruādibhāvā veditabbā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo ca assaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.65).
“说者”:于自身中具足“适时而说”等五种法,为拯济同梵行者而安住于彼状态,故称说者。“堪忍语者”:无论同梵行者如何言说,皆善纳其语,以恭顺受持之心忍受其言,故称堪忍语者。又,“说者”指以说法为常行之人。“堪忍语者”:于赞叹法时,不为他者所动,能堪忍其问,故称堪忍语者。“作甚深之论者”:作四谛、缘起等甚深之论,或作其他甚深之论。“不于非处劝导者”:不依非法、非律等而说,唯依法、律而阐明,故不于非处劝导。显示巴利原文
Vattāti ‘‘kālena vakkhāmī’’tiādipañcadhamme attani upaṭṭhāpetvā sabrahmacārīnaṃ ullumpanabhāve ṭhatvā vattā. Vacanakkhamoti sabrahmacārīhi yena kenaci vuccamāno subbaco hutvā padakkhiṇaggāhitāya tesaṃ vacanaṃ khamatīti vacanakkhamo. Vattāti vā dhammakathāvasena vacanasīlo. Vacanakkhamoti dhammaṃ saṃvaṇṇento parehi asaṃhīro hutvā tesaṃ pucchāvacanakkhamatāya vacanakkhamo. Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattāti saccapaṭiccasamuppādādiṃ, aññaṃ vā gambhīrakathaṃ kattā. Na caṭṭhāne niyojakoti dhammavinayādiṃ adhammāvinayādivasena avatvā dhammavinayādivaseneva dīpanato na ca aṭṭhāne niyojako.
此处,“杀母、杀父”之义为:依“渴爱生人”(相应部1.55-57)之说,渴爱于三有中产生众生,故名为“母”;因依父亲而生起“我是某国王、某大臣之子”的我慢,故我慢名为“父”。如世间人侍奉国王,一切恶见皆依附于常见与断见,故此二邪见名为“二王”(两位刹帝利王)。十二处以普遍扩展之义,犹如国土,故名为“国土”。依止于它的喜贪,如同随侍的执事,名为“随从”。显示巴利原文
Mātaraṃ pitaraṃ hantvāti ettha ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57) vacanato tīsu bhavesu sattānaṃ jananato taṇhā mātā nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ asukassa nāma rañño, rājamahāmattassa vā putto’’ti pitaraṃ nissāya asmimānassa uppajjanato asmimāno pitā nāma. Loko viya rājānaṃ yasmā sabbadiṭṭhigatāni dve sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyo bhajanti, tasmā sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyo dve khattiyā rājāno nāma. Dvādasāyatanāni vitthataṭṭhena raṭṭhasadisattā raṭṭhaṃ nāma. Āyasādhako āyuttakapuriso viya taṃnissito nandirāgo anucaro nāma.
“无恼”:即无苦。“婆罗门”:即漏尽者。因彼以阿拉汉道智之剑,已斩断、排除渴爱等烦恼,故彼婆罗门成为无苦者,向前行进。显示巴利原文
Anīghoti niddukkho. Brāhmaṇoti khīṇāsavo. Etena hi taṇhādayo arahattamaggañāṇāsinā hatā bāhitā. Yātīti so brāhmaṇo niddukkho hutvā yātīti.
“身”:指此业生之身。“心”:指作为基础禅那的禅那心。“融合”:指投入。若欲以可见之身行进时,便决意以身行为主的基础禅那心,此即是义。又,“于心融入身”者:若欲速行时,便将身投入基础禅那心中,决意以心行为主之身,此即是义。关于“入于身中乐想与轻想”:犹如力士屈伸臂,有神通者如是入于身中乐想与轻想后,以众人共见之身,游观园林、美景等,于一念顷即至所欲之处。显示巴利原文
Kāyeti karajakāye. Cittanti pādakajjhānacittaṃ. Samodahatīti pakkhipati. Yadā dissamānena kāyena gantukāmo hoti, tadā kāyagatikaṃ pādakajjhānacittaṃ adhiṭṭhahatīti attho. Cittepi kāyaṃ samodahatīti yadā sīghaṃ gantukāmo hoti, tadā pādakajjhānacitte kāyaṃ pakkhipati, cittagatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahatīti attho. Kāye sukhasaññañca lahusaññañca okkamitvāti ‘‘seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṃ vā bāhaṃ pasāreyya, pasāritaṃ vā bāhaṃ samiñjeyyā’’ti vuttanayena (mahāva. 8, 137; dī. ni. 2.66; ma. ni. 1.282; 2.338; saṃ. ni. 1.172) iddhimā kāye sukhasaññañca lahusaññañca okkamitvā paresaṃ dissamānena kāyena ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādīni pekkhamāno cittakkhaṇeneva icchitaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati.
“那种出世间智”:之所以这样说,是因为它超越、征服一切世间而安住,并非因为处在出世间的层次。“一切时生起”:之所以这样说,是因为它随心的转向而生起,并不是指它持续不断地生起。因为,世尊的一切知智并非在一切时都生起,故可以这样说。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ taṃ lokuttaraṃ ñāṇanti sabbaṃ lokaṃ uttaritvā abhibhavitvā ṭhitattā vuttaṃ, na pana lokuttarabhūmikattā. Sabbakāle pavattatīti āvajjanapaṭibaddhavuttittā vuttaṃ, na satataṃ samitaṃ pavattatīti. Na hi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ bhagavato sabbasmiṃyeva kāle uppajjatīti sakkā vattunti.
“我为你称说寂静”:由于一切烦恼止息之故,我将为你开示寂静,也就是涅槃。“于现法”:指于现前所见的苦等诸法,或就在此有身之中。“非传说”:并不是“据说是这样、听说是如此”那种辗转传闻的讲法,而是自己亲自证知,这就是此处的意思。“了知后正念而行”:了知此寂静后,依“一切行无常”等法,以圣道保持正念而住。“于世间度越渴爱”:对于行世间中因四处蔓延而被称为渴爱的烦恼,应当度越、超越它,这就是此处的意思。显示巴利原文
Kittayissāmi te santinti sabbakilesavūpasamahetutāya santiṃ nibbānaṃ dassessāmi. Diṭṭhe dhammeti diṭṭhe dukkhādidhamme, imasmiṃ eva vā attabhāve. Anītihanti itihāsāti evaṃ na itikirāya pavattaṃ, attapaccakkhanti attho. Yaṃ viditvā sato caranti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 277; theragā. 676; netti. 5) nayena sato hutvā caranto ariyamaggena yaṃ santiṃ viditvā. Tare loke visattikanti saṅkhāraloke visappanato visattikasaṅkhātaṃ taṇhaṃ tare tareyya samatikkameyyāti attho.
“我欢喜那”:多答迦说,我希求你所宣说的那种彰显寂静的话语,我也直接欢喜、随喜那最上的寂静本身。“上方、下方、横向及中间”:其中“上方”指未来及上方;“下方”指过去及下方;“横向及中间”指现在及周围。“若知此,即贪著”:了知这未来等诸处,便是生起贪著之处。“于有有”:是为了大大小小的诸有,或是为了常见与断见。显示巴利原文
Tañcāhaṃ abhinandāmīti taṃ vuttappakāraṃ santijotakaṃ tumhākaṃ vacanaṃ ahaṃ patthayāmi, taṃ eva vā santiṃ uttamaṃ abhinandāmīti dhotako vadati. Uddhaṃ adho tiriyañcāpi majjheti ettha uddhanti anāgataṃ upari ca. Adhoti atītaṃ heṭṭhā ca. Tiriyañcāpi majjheti paccuppannaṃ parito ca. Etaṃ viditvā saṅgotīti etaṃ anāgatādiṃ saṅgajananaṭṭhānanti ñatvā. Bhavābhavāyāti khuddakānañceva mahantānañca bhavānaṃ atthāya, sassatucchedāya vā.
“圣谛”:指能令人成就圣位的真理。“未现观”:因不觉悟、不了知。“未证悟”:因未以智慧透彻通达。“流转”:因从此有到彼有而行进,故为流转。“轮回”:因再三地重复行进,故为轮回。“我与你们的”:即由我与你们。或者说,“流转、轮回”的意思,是指我与你们的流转、轮回曾发生。“有爱”:指能牵引向诸有的渴爱之绳。“已萦缠”:指已受缠缚而轮回。“已根除”:指已彻底断除、斩断,令不再生起。显示巴利原文
Ariyasaccānanti ariyabhāvakarānaṃ saccānaṃ. Ananubodhāti abujjhanena ajānanena. Appaṭivedhāti appaṭivijjhanena. Sandhāvitanti bhavato bhavassa gamanena sandhāvitaṃ. Saṃsaritanti punappunaṃ gamanavasena saṃsaritaṃ. Mamañceva tumhākañcāti mayā ceva tumhehi ca. Atha vā sandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritanti sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ mamañceva tumhākañca ahosīti attho. Bhavanettīti bhavābhavaṃ nayanasamatthā taṇhārajju. Saṃsitanti saṃsaritaṃ. Samūhatāti suṭṭhu hatā chinnā appavattikatā.
“一切行无常”:由诸缘和合造作而成,故得名为“行”,即五蕴。因其有边际、有终尽、是暂时、刹那灭尽的,故非恒常,称为“无常”。“当以慧观照时”:当以观慧观照时,则对此轮回之苦生起厌离;由厌离,通过遍知苦等方式证悟诸谛。“这就是清净之道”:如所说方式证悟诸谛,此即为清净之道。“一切行是苦”:一切行因有反复逼迫之义与坏灭之义,故为苦。其余如前所说。“一切法无我”:一切三界诸法,因是异己的、空虚的、空无的、无实体的、不受主宰的,故为“无我”。其余与前述类似。显示巴利原文
Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti paccayehi saṅkharīyantīti ‘‘saṅkhārā’’ti laddhanāmā pañcakkhandhā. Ādiantavantato aniccantikato tāvakālikato khaṇaparittato ca na niccāti aniccā. Yadā paññāya passatīti yadā vipassanāpaññāya passati. Atha imasmiṃ vaṭṭadukkhe nibbindati, nibbindanto dukkhaparijānanādivasena saccāni paṭivijjhati. Esa maggo visuddhiyāti yvāyaṃ vuttanayena saccappaṭivedho, esa visuddhatthāya maggo. Sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhāti sabbe saṅkhārā abhiṇhasampaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena khayaṭṭhena ca dukkhāti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Sabbe dhammā anattāti sabbepi tebhūmakadhammā parato tucchato suññato asārato avasavattanato ca anattāti. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.
「胜」:指优胜、最上的。「等」:指同等的。「劣」:指低劣的。而「卑下」这样的心态,也是通过贬低自己的方式,以执取的形式生起的,因此说「我是劣的」。「除了不如实观照,还能有什么其他原因呢」:色法等本身即坏灭,其本质绝不安住;对于这样的色法,生起「我是胜」「我是等」等抬高自己的想法,除了由于不如实照见它们、处于无知之外,又能有什么其他原因呢?意思是,绝无其他原因。受等诸蕴也是如此。反过来,若是善的方面,则应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Seyyoti visiṭṭho uttamo. Sadisoti samāno. Hīnoti lāmako. Omānopi hi attano avaṅkaraṇamukhenapi saṃpaggaṇhanavaseneva pavattati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘hīnohamasmī’’ti. Kimaññatra yathābhūtassa adassanāti sarasapabhaṅgutāya ekanteneva anavaṭṭhitasabhāvehi rūpadhammehi seyyādivasena attano ukkhipanassa tesaṃ yathābhūtaṃ adassanaṃ aññāṇaṃ vinā kiṃ aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ siyā, aññaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ tassa natthīti attho. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
「那些令圣谛彰显者」:以智慧的光明,摧毁遮蔽圣谛的烦恼黑暗,令苦等圣谛自身清晰、明显地呈现出来。「具甚深慧者」:因为智慧不可计量,即使是包含天神在内的世间,其智慧也不足以测度、安立其深度,所以这里所说的正是拥有一切知智的佛陀。「善说之法」:通过略说、广说等种种方便善巧开阐的法。即使那些人可能极为放逸,意思是:这些已令圣谛彰显的圣者们,虽然在遇到天王位、转轮王位等容易导致放逸的境遇后,也许显得非常放逸;然而,因为在证得入流道智时,那作为轮回推动力的行作识已灭尽,除了剩余的七有之外,在无始轮回中本应生起的名色,由于已经灭尽,他们不会再执取第八有,只会在第七有中着手修观,证得阿拉汉果。这就是此处所说的意思。显示巴利原文
Ye ariyasaccāni vibhāvayantīti dukkhādīni ariyasaccāni paññāobhāsena saccappaṭicchādakakilesandhakāraṃ vidhametvā attano pakāsāni pākaṭāni karonti. Gambhīrapaññenāti appameyyapaññatāya sadevakassapi lokassa ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhapaññena sabbaññunāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sudesitānīti saṅkhepavitthārādīhi tehi tehi nayehi suṭṭhu desitāni. Kiñcāpi te honti bhusaṃ pamattāti te vibhāvitaariyasaccā puggalā kāmaṃ devarajjacakkavattirajjādipamādaṭṭhānaṃ āgamma bhusaṃ pamattā honti, tathāpi sotāpattimaggañāṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhena ṭhapetvā satta bhave anamatagge saṃsāre ye uppajjeyyuṃ nāmañca rūpañca, tesaṃ niruddhattā na aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ ādiyanti, sattamabhaveyeva pana vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇantīti attho.
「犹如因陀罗柱」:这里的「犹如」是譬喻的措辞。「因陀罗柱」:这是指为加固城门,在门闩横木中央掘地八肘或十肘后,打入其中的那根坚木柱子的专名。「倚立于地」:因根基深厚,深入之后倚立于大地,应当如此。「四风所吹」:被来自四个方向的风所吹刮。「不可摇动」:不能被摇撼或摆动。我说,如此譬喻:凡是能以智慧深入观照四圣谛的人,由于见到其与这根柱子具备相似的品质,我便将那位善士、那位上人,譬喻为前面所说的因陀罗柱;因为如实明见的缘故,他不会被一切外道议论之风所动摇。这就是此处的意思。显示巴利原文
Yathindakhīloti ettha yathāti upamāvacanaṃ. Indakhīloti nagaradvārathirakaraṇatthaṃ ummārabbhantare aṭṭha vā dasa vā hatthe pathaviṃ khaṇitvā ākoṭitassa sāradārumayassa thambhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pathavissito siyāti gambhīranemitāya anto pavisitvā bhūminissito siyā bhaveyya. Catubbhi vātehīti catūhi disāhi āgatavātehi. Asampakampiyoti kampetuṃ vā cāletuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo. Tathūpamaṃ…pe… passatīti yo cattāri ariyasaccāni paññāya ajjhogāhetvā passati, taṃ sappurisaṃ uttamapurisaṃ tathā dassanato sabbatitthiyavādavātehi asampakampiyatāya tathūpamaṃ yathāvuttaindakhīlūpamaṃ vadāmīti attho.
「以预流支」:以成为圣预流之组成部分的法。「圣声闻」:因在圣者佛陀、世尊处听闻正法而生起,故为圣声闻。「我已断尽地狱」:我已灭尽地狱。「已断尽恶趣、苦趣、堕落处」:这仅仅是地狱等名称的同义语而已。地狱等因远离了名为增长的吉祥,故为「恶趣」;是苦的去处与归宿,故为「苦趣」;造恶业者被强制性地堕落其中,故为「堕落处」。已初次证得、进入圣道之流者,为「须陀洹」。道果的法性不可动摇,决不会堕入凡夫那类凡夫状态中去,其本性如此,故为「不退堕法」。正因如此,由法性自然决定而成为定当成就者,故为「决定者」。因必定要证得以上三道所摄的正觉,以正觉作为其最终的归趣和去处,故为「菩提道」。显示巴利原文
Sotāpattiyaṅgehīti ariyasotāpajjanassa aṅgabhūtehi. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa buddhassa bhagavato saddhammassavanante jātattā ariyasāvako. Khīṇanirayomhīti khīṇanirayo amhi. Khīṇāpāyaduggativinipātoti idaṃ nirayādīnaṃyeva vevacanavasena vuttaṃ. Nirayādayo hi vaḍḍhisaṅkhātato ayato apetattā apāyā. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggatiyo. Dukkaṭakārino vivasā ettha nipatantīti vinipātā. Sotaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ādito patto adhigatoti sotāpanno. Akuppadhammatāya maggaphalānaṃ puthujjanabhāvasaṅkhāte virūpe na nipatanasabhāvoti avinipātadhammo. Tato eva dhammaniyāmena niyatatāya niyato. Uparimaggattayasaṅkhātā sambodhi avassaṃ pattabbatāya assa paraṃ ayanaṃ gati paṭisaraṇanti sambodhiparāyaṇo.
「安住」等词彼此是同义词。「同法者」是指同修梵行者。「圣所喜」:为圣者们所喜爱、中意、可意。五戒对圣弟子们来说确是可爱的,因为即使在其他生中也不会舍弃。这是就此而说。然而,这里这一切防护也都是可以获得的。「我是入流者」——这只是教说的开头。一来者等也以「我是一来者」等方式记说。因为只要不与学处相违,在适当的场合,一切圣弟子的记说都是被允许的。显示巴利原文
Niviṭṭhātiādīni padāni aññamaññavevacanāneva. Sahadhammiyāti sabrahmacārino. Ariyakantehīti ariyānaṃ kantehi piyehi manāpehi. Pañca sīlāni hi ariyasāvakānaṃ kantāni honti, bhavantarepi avijahanato. Tāni sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbopi panettha saṃvaro labbhatiyeva. Sotāpannohamasmīti idaṃ desanāsīsameva. Sakadāgāmiādayopi ‘‘sakadāgāmīhamasmī’’tiādinā nayena byākarontiyeva. Yato sabbesampi sikkhāpadāvirodhena yuttaṭṭhāne byākaraṇaṃ anuññātamevāti.
「若人诸根」:指某位圣者的信等诸根。「善修习」:依圣道修习而善得修习。「于内、于外」:为断除下分结和上分结。是故说「于一切世界」。「洞彻」:即穿透而通达。显示巴利原文
Yassindriyānīti yassa ariyapuggalassa saddhādīni indriyāni. Subhāvitānīti ariyamaggabhāvanāvasena suṭṭhu bhāvitāni. Ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā cāti orambhāgiyānaṃ uddhambhāgiyānañca saṃyojanānaṃ pajahanavasena. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaloke’’ti. Nibbijjhāti nibbijjhitvā paṭivijjhitvā.
「法句」:指法的部分。所谓「无贪法句」,即是指无贪,或指以无贪为首而证得的禅那、观、道、果、涅槃,又或以十不净而证得的禅那等,这便是无贪法句。以四梵住所证得者,为「无嗔法句」。以十随念、食厌想所证得者,为「正念法句」。以十遍、入出息念所证得者,为「正定法句」。显示巴利原文
Dhammapadānīti dhammakoṭṭhāsāni. Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ nāma alobho vā alobhasīsena adhigatajhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni vā dasaasubhavasena vā adhigatajhānādīni anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ. Catubrahmavihāravasena adhigatāni abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ. Dasānussatiāhārepaṭikkūlasaññāvasena adhigatāni sammāsati dhammapadaṃ. Dasakasiṇaānāpānavasena adhigatāni sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṃ.
「断五」:即断除五种能令堕入恶趣再生的下分结,犹如有人以刀砍断绑在脚上的绳索,以三道断除。「舍五」:即舍断五种能令上生天界的上分结,犹如有人砍断绑在颈上的绳索,以阿拉汉道舍断,也就是断除的意思。「更修五」:为断除上分结,应更修习信等五根。「超越五执」:如此,便超越贪、嗔、痴、慢、见五种执著,成为度五执者,这位比丘即被称为「渡瀑流者」,也就是渡越四瀑流者,这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Pañca chindeti heṭṭhā apāyupapattisaṃvattanikāni pañca orambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni pāde baddharajjuṃ viya puriso satthena heṭṭhā maggattayena chindeyya. Pañca jaheti uparidevalokasampāpakāni pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni puriso gīvāya baddharajjuṃ viya arahattamaggena jaheyya chindeyyevāti attho. Pañca cuttari bhāvayeti uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ pahānatthāya saddhādīni pañcindriyāni uttari bhāveyya. Pañca saṅgātigoti evaṃ sante pañcannaṃ rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhisaṅgānaṃ atikkamanena pañcasaṅgātigo hutvā bhikkhu ‘‘oghatiṇṇo’’ti vuccati, nittiṇṇacaturoghoti vuccatīti attho.
对于尚未了知、尚未通达的四圣谛法,或者对于“我将了知、将证知不死之境”而修行的初道者之根,称为“未知当知根”。初道智确是依其前分而如此说的。以初道所了知的范围,不超越该界限而了知,称为“已了知”,此根称为“已知根”。显示巴利原文
Anaññātaṃ appaṭividdhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ, amatapadaṃyeva vā ñassāmi jānissāmīti paṭipannassa paṭhamamaggaṭṭhassa indriyanti anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ. Paṭhamamaggañāṇañhi taṃpubbabhāgavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ājānāti paṭhamamaggena ñātamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā jānātīti añño, tassa indriyanti aññindriyaṃ, heṭṭhā tīsu phalesu, upari tīsu maggesu ca ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aññātāvino catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitakiccassa arahato indriyanti aññātāvindriyaṃ, aggaphalañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Anabhisametassāti appaṭividdhassa. Abhisamayāyāti paṭivedhāya.
「愚者相」:指愚者的显著特征与原因。「愚者征」:指为认定“这是愚者”的征象与原因。「愚者迹」:指愚者过去所累积、已增长的行为。于“恶思者”等中,思惟贪欲、嗔恚、邪见者,为恶思者;言说妄语等者,为恶言者;造作杀生等业者,为恶行者。与此相反的,即是善的一面,应当了知。显示巴利原文
Bālalakkhaṇānīti bālassa upalakkhaṇakāraṇāni. Bālanimittānīti ‘‘bālo aya’’nti gahetuṃ nimittāni kāraṇāni. Bālāpadānānīti bālassa porāṇāni viruḷhāni kammāni. ‘‘Duccintitacintī’’tiādīsu duccintitaṃ abhijjhaṃ byāpādaṃ micchādassanañca cintetīti duccintitacintī. Dubbhāsitaṃ musāvādādiṃ bhāsatīti dubbhāsitabhāsī. Dukkaṭaṃ pāṇātipātādikammaṃ karotīti dukkaṭakammakārī. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
Bhiyyo:指一再地、更甚地。「应愤怒(pakujjheyyuṃ)」:指应生起违逆。也有读为「应恼怒(pakuppeyyuṃ)」的异读。「以猛烈(bhusena)」:以强力。「以杖(daṇḍena)」:指施以杖罚。「贤者(dhīro)」:指有智者、具慧者。「制止(nisedhaye)」:指抗拒、遮止,意为令对方不能再说或再做任何事。显示巴利原文
Bhiyyoti uparūpari. Pakujjheyyunti virujjheyyuṃ. ‘‘Pakuppeyyu’’ntipi pāṭho. Bhusenāti daḷhena. Daṇḍenāti daṇḍadānena. Dhīroti paṇḍito sappaññajātiko. Nisedhayeti paṭibāheyya. Puna kiñci kātuṃ vattuṃ vā asamatthaṃ kareyyāti attho.
Paraṃ(敌)指怨敌。「有念而平息者(yo sato upasammati)」:即具足正念而平息的人。我认为,那平息本身便正是对愚者的制止。这便是(我的)意思。显示巴利原文
Paranti paccatthikaṃ. Yo sato upasammatīti yo satimā hutvā upasammati, tassa upasamaṃyevāhaṃ bālassa paṭisedhanaṃ maññāmīti attho.
「过失(vajjaṃ)」:指瞋怒。当他将其视为自己的(yadā naṃ maññati),即因其如此认为。「欺凌(ajjhāruhatī)」:指压迫、欺压。就像牛群之中,当有两头牛在角力时,牛群便围观等待,直到一方败逃;而一旦有一方逃跑,整个牛群反而更凶猛地追迫败逃者。同样地,愚劣之人对忍辱者,便会愈发欺凌。这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Vajjanti dosaṃ. Yadā naṃ maññatīti yasmā naṃ maññati. Ajjhāruhatīti ajjhottharati. Gova bhiyyo palāyinanti yathā goyūthe tāvadeva dve gāvo yujjhante gogaṇo olokento tiṭṭhati yāva na eko palāyati, yadā pana palāyati, atha taṃ palāyīnaṃ sabbo gogaṇo bhiyyo ajjhottharati, evaṃ dummedho khamantaṃ bhiyyo ajjhottharatīti attho.
「以自己利为最上(sadatthaparamā)」:指将自己的利益视为最重。在那些将自己的利益视为最重的人当中,根本没有比忍耐更超胜的利益。因此,他们说:「忍耐为最上。」真正有力的人能安忍不动,他们便称那忍耐为最上。所谓愚人的力量,即是无知的力量。拥有这种力量的人,其实是真正的无力,他们说那根本不是力量,并且这样说明、开示。「法守护者(dhammaguttassa)」:指以法守护自己的人,或者是守护法的人。「反骂(paṭivattā)」:指被骂之后再骂回去,或是被他人以任何话语绕转地说时,同样绕转地说回去。然而,根本没有一人有能力动摇那位安住于法中的人。「唯有他以此更苦」:意思是,就因为这个忿怒,唯有那个人自己会获得更重的苦。哪个人呢?就是对忿怒者回以忿怒的人。在这里,「忿怒者(kuddhaṃ)」是用作间接宾语的受格,意思是「对忿怒者」。「治疗者(tikicchantānaṃ)」:在这里用复数形式表示单数,意思是「正在治疗的人」。人们这样认为:「像这」显示巴利原文
Sadatthaparamāti sakatthaparamā. Khantyā bhiyyo na vijjatīti tesu sakatthaparamesu atthesu khantito uttaritaro añño attho na vijjati. Tamāhu paramaṃ khantinti yo balavā titikkhati, tassa taṃ khantiṃ paramaṃ āhu. Bālabalaṃ nāma aññāṇabalaṃ. Taṃ yassa balaṃ, abalameva taṃ, na taṃ balanti āhu kathenti dīpenti. Dhammaguttassāti dhammena rakkhitassa dhammaṃ vā rakkhantassa. Paṭivattāti paṭippharitvā vattā, paṭipparitvā vā yaṃ vā taṃ vā vadeyyāsi. Dhammaṭṭhaṃ pana cāletuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Tasseva tena pāpiyoti tena kodhena tasseva puggalassa pāpaṃ hoti. Katarassāti ? Yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati, tassa. Tattha kuddhanti sampadāne upayogavacanaṃ, kuddhassāti attho. Tikicchantānanti ekavacane bahuvacanaṃ, tikicchantanti attho. Janā maññantīti evarūpaṃ attano ca parassa cāti ubhinnaṃ atthaṃ tikicchantaṃ nipphādentaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘bālo aya’’nti andhabālaputhujjanā evaṃ maññanti. Ye dhammassa akovidāti ye catusaccadhamme akovidā acchekā, te evaṃ maññantīti attho.
「已得(pattaṃ)」:指现已获得、正在受用的欲乐资具。「应得(pattabbaṃ)」:指未来应当获得、应当受用的同类事物。这两者合称为「被尘垢所染(rajānukiṇṇaṃ)」,即两者皆被贪欲等尘垢所混杂。「为烦恼所逼迫者(āturassa)」:指受贪等烦恼逼迫的人。「跟随学习者(anusikkhato)」:指向烦恼深重者学习的人。「那些以修学为核心者(ye ca sikkhāsārā)」:指那些如自己所受持,将戒与仪所摄的修学执取为核心而安住的人。因此,他说:「戒、仪、命、梵行」。其中,「我不那样做」而主动舍离的,即是戒;关于衣着、食物、行为、行仪等,即是仪;命指活命;梵行指离淫欲。「以近行为核心者(upaṭṭhānasārā)」:指以这些戒等的随行、修习为核心的人。「以此即能达成轮回清净」:意思是,他们将那些东西执取为核心,以为这样做便能清净。这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Pattanti adhigataṃ etarahi anubhuyyamānaṃ kāmūpakaraṇaṃ pattabbanti tadeva anāgate adhigantabbaṃ anubhavitabbaṃ, ubhayametaṃ rajānukiṇṇanti tadubhayampi rāgarajādīhi avakiṇṇaṃ . Āturassāti rāgādikilesāturassa. Anusikkhatoti kilesabahulapuggale anusikkhato. Ye ca sikkhāsārāti ye yathāsamādinnaṃ sīlavatādisaṅkhātaṃ sikkhaṃ sārato gahetvā ṭhitā. Tenāha – ‘‘sīlaṃ vataṃ jīvitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti. Tattha yaṃ ‘‘na karomī’’ti oramati, taṃ sīlaṃ. Yaṃ vesabhojanakiccacaraṇādi, taṃ vataṃ. Jīvitanti ājīvo. Brahmacariyanti methunavirati. Upaṭṭhānasārāti etesaṃ sīlādīnaṃ anuṭṭhānasārā. Etehi eva saṃsārasuddhīti tāni sārato gahetvā ṭhitāti attho.
如上所述,这两个极端即是:以戒禁取为门的自苦行,以及以视欲乐无过失为门的纵欲享乐修行——这就是二边。而且,他们依次第:因执著于未来当得与现在已得、并夹杂着贪等尘垢的五欲功德,又随学于诸烦恼深重之人,最终自身也如此与烦恼深重者一同修行。由此,他们便成了“增长尸林的人”,恒与老死相伴,于尸林中增长不已,必使尸林繁盛;不仅自己增长,还劝令其他众生在这两种极端中愈陷愈深。这就是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Iccete ubho antāti iti sīlabbataparāmāsamukhena attakilamathānuyogo, kāmesu anavajjasaññitāmukhena kāmasukhallikānuyogo cāti ete ubho antā. Te ca kho yathākkamaṃ āyatiṃ pattabbe, etarahi patte ca rāgarajādiokiṇṇe kāmaguṇe allīnehi kilesāturānaṃ anusikkhantehi, sayañca kilesātureheva paṭipajjitabbā, tato eva ca te kaṭasivaḍḍhanā aparāparaṃ jarāmaraṇehi sivathikāya vaḍḍhanasīlā ekanteneva kaṭasiṃ vaḍḍhenti, sayaṃ vaḍḍhantā pare ca antadvaye samādapentā vaḍḍhāpenti cāti attho.
「不知二边(ubho ante anabhiññāya)」:即不了知如上所说的这两种极端。「有者沉滞(olīyanti eke)」:指一类人依于“我与世间是常”这种沉滞的渴爱与执取,从而沉溺、滞着于此。「有者过度(atidhāvanti eke)」:指一类人依于“我与世间断灭、坏灭”这种过度的渴爱与执取,从而逾越中道,奔逸至另一端。显示巴利原文
Ubho ante anabhiññāyāti yathāvutte ubho ante ajānitvā. Olīyanti eketi ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti olīyanataṇhābhinivesavasena avalīyanti ekacce. Atidhāvanti eketi ekacce – ‘‘ucchijjati vinassati attā ca loko cā’’ti atidhāvanābhinivesavasena atikkamanti.
「不认为(na maññiṃsu)」:因为他们的渴爱等一切妄执已彻底断尽。正因如此,从无余依般涅槃之后,对于他们而言,三种轮转的施设全然无有。显示巴利原文
Naamaññiṃsu tesañca taṇhādimaññanānaṃ pahīnattā. Tato eva anupādāparinibbānato tividhampi vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ paññāpanāya natthīti.
「Jaññā」意为应知。 「Saṃyujeti」意为应系缚。 「Mānusaṃ」指属于人类的,也就是含摄在人类生存状态中的。因为一个众生正走向死亡之口时,除了善业之外,还有什么可称为他“自己的”呢?众生确实是业的所有者。因此,他说“所以应行善”等。其中,「有关来世的(samparāyikaṃ)」指能产生来世果报的。显示巴利原文
Jaññāti jāneyya. Saṃyujeti saṃyojeyya. Mānusanti manussānaṃ idanti mānusaṃ, manussabhavapariyāpannaṃ. Kiñhi tassa sakaṃ hotīti tassa maccumukhaṃ pavisantassa sattassa kiṃ aññaṃ sakaṃ nāma aññatra kalyāṇakammato. Kammassakā hi sattā. Tenāha – ‘‘tasmā kareyya kalyāṇa’’ntiādi. Tattha samparāyikanti samparāyaphalanibbattakaṃ.
「这些法」指这些善或不善的法。 「这样被执取」指这样被领受、被生起。 「此是果」指可意的果报和不可意的果报。 「此是增益」意思是“这是增长,这是衰退”。此外,还有“同此类”的说法,他称为“应一向记说”。显示巴利原文
Ime dhammāti ime kusalā vā akusalā vā dhammā. Evaṃgahitāti evaṃ samādinnā uppāditā. Idaṃ phalanti idaṃ iṭṭhavipākaṃ aniṭṭhavipākañca phalaṃ. Ayamatthoti ayaṃ vuḍḍhi, ayaṃ hānīti attho. Aññampi evaṃjātiyanti ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyaṃ vadati.
“对期望者不应知”(ākaṅkhato na jāneyyuṃ):此处是说,由于世尊的期望,其因由是他人无法触及的领域,所以他说:“‘世尊期望什么?’这个问题是不应被解释的。”显示巴利原文
Ākaṅkhato na jāneyyunti tattha yena hetunā bhagavato yā ākaṅkhā, sā aññesaṃ avisayoti āha – ‘‘kintaṃ bhagavā ākaṅkhatīti. Idaṃ avisajjanīya’’nti.
“这么多”(ettako):是指有这个数量。“以圣戒蕴”(sīlakkhandhe):是指由圣戒蕴。也有读作“圣戒蕴”(具格)。其余各句的道理相同。“以威仪”(iriyāya):是指以身语行为。“以威力”(pabhāve):是指以大神力。“以利益求”(hitesitāya):是指以慈爱。“以神通”(iddhiyā):是指以种种神通。这些是佛陀的功德,而且每一功德都具有这样的威力。同样地,道、果与涅槃也具有如此的大神力。圣僧伽便与这样的功德相应。显示巴利原文
Ettakoti etaparimāṇo. Sīlakkhandheti sīlakkhandhahetu. ‘‘Sīlakkhandhenā’’tipi pāṭho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Iriyāyanti kāyavacīsamācāre. Pabhāveti ānubhāve. Hitesitāyanti mettāya. Iddhiyanti iddhividhāya. Ettakā buddhaguṇā, te ca paccekaṃ evaṃpabhāvā. Tathā maggaphalanibbānāni evamānubhāvāni. Ariyasaṅgho evaṃvidhaguṇehi yuttoti.
三宝的大威力并非在一切方面都是他人所能领悟的领域,它唯独是世尊的领域,因此说:“佛陀的领域是不应被解释的。”借此也表明:凡是属于佛陀领域的其他道理,也都是不应被解释的。世尊曾这样说:“佛陀的领域是不可思维、不应思维的,谁若去思维,就会招致迷乱与苦恼。”(《增支部》4.77)所谓“过去的最初点是哪个”,是不应被解释的,因为无论谁提出“过去的最初点是哪个”这样的问题,都不应被解释。为什么呢?因为轮回并没有最初的点。所以世尊说:“比丘们,过去的最初点不可知。”(《增支部》10.61)这里,“不可知”(na paññāyatī)的意思是“不被看见,不被获得”。另外,还有一种意思是“不可知”指“不成为他人智识的领域”,由此而说:“不可知,是因为声闻的智有欠缺”等等。其中,“以我为导引者”(attūpanāyikā)的意思是“应当把‘我’引入于此”。所谓“对佛陀世尊来说,没有不晓知的事物”,这是在说明:正是因为没有最初点,所以才不可知,并非智慧于此有什么障碍。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahānubhāvatā na sabbathā aññesaṃ visayo, bhagavato eva visayoti āha – ‘‘buddhavisayo avisajjanīyo’’ti. Tena yo aññopi attho buddhavisayo, so avisajjanīyoti dasseti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yaṃ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Katamā pubbā koṭīti avisajjanīyanti ‘‘katamā pubbā koṭī’’ti kenaci kataṃ pucchanaṃ avisajjanīyaṃ. Kasmā? Saṃsārassa purimāya koṭiyā abhāvato. Tenevāha – ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 10.61). Tattha na paññāyatīti na dissati, na upalabbhatīti attho. Na paññāyatīti aññassa ñāṇavisayo na hotīti pana atthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘na paññāyatīti sāvakānaṃ ñāṇavekallenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha attūpanāyikāti attā upanetabbo etissāti attūpanāyikā. Natthi buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ avijānanāti etena purimāya koṭiyā abhāvato eva na paññāyati, na tattha ñāṇassa paṭighātoti dasseti.
然而,只要是存在的事物,即使对他人而言无可测量,对世尊来说也并非不可测量。为显示世尊于一切处无碍的智慧,他说:“如同世尊针对拘迦利迦比丘……”等等。此处,“某位比丘”指姓名不详的比丘。一位比丘坐下后问道:“尊者,莲花地狱的寿量有多长?”世尊便对这位比丘这样说。此处省略了如下内容:“比丘,莲花地狱的寿量极长久,不容易以‘这么多岁’、‘这么多百年’、‘这么多千年’或‘这么多十万年’来计算。”“尊者,那么能作个譬喻吗?”“能,比丘。”世尊说,“比丘,譬如有辆能装载二十迦利的憍萨罗芝麻车。若有人每隔一百年从中取走一粒芝麻,比丘,那满载二十迦利的憍萨罗芝麻车,以此方式反而更快地取尽、耗尽,而一个阿浮陀地狱却绝不可能这样终结。比丘,就好比二十个阿浮陀地狱,才等于一个尼罗浮陀地狱……”等等。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana atthi, taṃ aññesaṃ appameyyampi bhagavato na appameyyanti bhagavato sabbattha appaṭihataññāṇataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā bhagavā kokālikaṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha aññataraṃ bhikkhunti nāmagottena apākaṭaṃ. ‘‘Kīva dīghaṃ nu kho, bhante, padume niraye āyuppamāṇa’’nti pañhaṃ pucchitvā nisinnaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ evamāhāti. Etthāyaṃ pāṭhaseso – dīghaṃ kho, bhikkhu, padume niraye āyuppamāṇaṃ, taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātuṃ ‘‘ettakāni vassānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakāni vassasatānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakāni vassasahassānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakāni vassasatasahassānī’’ti vāti. Sakkā pana, bhante, upamā kātunti. ‘‘Sakkā bhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avoca. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, vīsatikhāriko kosalako tilavāho. Tato puriso vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena ekamekaṃ tilaṃ uddhareyya. Khippataraṃ kho so, bhikkhu, vīsatikhāriko kosalako tilavāho iminā upakkamena parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gaccheyya, na tveva eko abbudo nirayo. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, vīsati abbudā nirayā, evameko nirabbudo nirayotiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.181; a. ni. 10.89; su. ni. kokālikasutta).
此处,「二十迦利载量」:依摩揭陀的量制,四钵陀等于憍萨罗国的一钵陀。以此钵陀计,四钵陀为一阿罗迦,四阿罗迦为一多那,四多那为一摩尼迦,四摩尼迦为一迦利。依此迦利,便有二十迦利的芝麻载量。「芝麻载量」即芝麻车。「阿浮陀地狱」:并非别有一处名为阿浮陀的地狱,而是在无间地狱中,依阿浮陀的计数方式,称那部分为“阿浮陀地狱”。这一道理,对尼罗浮陀等也同样适用。显示巴利原文
Tattha vīsatikhārikoti māgadhakena patthena cattāro patthā kosalaraṭṭhe eko pattho hoti. Tena patthena cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ, cattāri āḷhakāni doṇaṃ, catudoṇā mānikā, catumānikā khārī. Tāya khāriyā vīsatikhāriko tilavāho. Tilavāhoti tilasakaṭaṃ. Abbudo nirayoti abbudo nāma eko paccekanirayo natthi, avīcimhi eva pana abbudagaṇanāya paccanokāso ‘‘abbudo nirayo’’ti vutto. Esa nayo nirabbudādīsupi.
这里,年份的计数也应该这样来了解:比如,十万个十万是一亿。同样,十万个十万亿叫做一兆。十万个十万兆叫做千亿兆。十万个千亿兆是一那由他。十万个十万那由他是尼那由他。十万个尼那由他是一阿浮陀。二十个阿浮陀是一尼罗浮陀。一切处都可依此类推。因为这种计数对不熟悉的人来说非常困难,所以世尊说「不容易计算」(na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu)。不过,有些人说:“由于在这些地狱中各处的悲叹声不同,以及造业招来果报的差别,才得到了这些名称。”另一些人说:“这些是寒地狱。”「心已加害」(cittaṃ āghātetvā)的意思是“心已生起嗔恚”。显示巴利原文
Tattha vassagaṇanāpi evaṃ veditabbā – yathā hi sataṃsatasahassāni koṭi hoti. Evaṃ sataṃsatasahassakoṭiyo pakoṭi nāma. Sataṃsatasahassapakoṭiyo koṭipakoṭi nāma. Sataṃsatasahassakoṭipakoṭiyo nahutaṃ. Sataṃsatasahassanahutāni ninnahutaṃ. Sataṃsatasahassāni ninnahutāni eko abbudo. Tato vīsatiguṇo nirabbudo. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayañca gaṇanā aparicitānaṃ dukkarāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu’’nti. Keci pana ‘‘tattha tattha paridevanānattena kammakāraṇanānattenapi imāni nāmāni laddhānī’’ti vadanti. Apare ‘‘sītanarakā ete’’ti. Cittaṃ āghātetvāti cittaṃ padūsetvā.
“怎样胜?”是询问方式。“以何而胜?”是询问原因。他问的是:以什么原因、什么理由、何种行道而胜?而问“怎样”时,则是问:以什么方式?是通过断除过去的烦恼,还是断除未来或现在的烦恼而胜?因此,这被称为“应被回答的”。“谁是胜者?”是问:胜者具有什么形态?是色、受、想、行、识,还是离于色等之外另有胜者,即那个被称作“我”的?正是针对这个意思,才说“不应被回答的”。“多少?”是从数量的方面问:有多少数量。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ jinoti pakārapucchā. Kena jinoti kāraṇapucchā. Kena kāraṇena kena hetunā kāya paṭipattiyā jinoti pucchati. Kathanti pana kena pakārena kiṃ atītānaṃ, udāhu anāgatānaṃ paccuppannānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānena jinoti pucchati, tasmā taṃ ‘‘visajjanīya’’nti vuttaṃ. Katamo jinoti kiṃ rūpaṃ jino, udāhu vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ jino. Rūpādivinimutto vā añño jino, yo ‘‘attā’’ti vuccatīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘avisajjanīya’’nti. Kittakoti pamāṇato kiṃparimāṇo.
“有如来”,意为“有众生”。因为那位具寿,是依于五蕴而被施设为“有这样的名,有这样的姓”,正是意指这样一位补特伽罗,所以说是“应被回答的”。“色是如来”,是指依于有身见而问“色即是我”,因此说是“不应被回答的”。以此方法,一切句中的义理应被理解。显示巴利原文
Atthitathāgatoti atthi satto. Yvāyamāyasmā ‘‘evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto’’ti pañcakkhandhe upādāya paññapīyati, tassa puggalassa adhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘visajjanīya’’nti. Rūpaṃ tathāgatoti rūpaṃ attāti sakkāyadiṭṭhivasena pucchatīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘avisajjanīya’’nti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
「愚人登上座位」等词,是以受格表示所属之义。「以身行恶行」即以身造作恶行。「依附」指悬挂、覆盖。其余两句为其同义词。因为它们以悬挂等方式现起,故如此说。「大」指大的。「在地上依附」指铺展于地面。其余两句为其同义词。那正是铺展的方式。在此情形下,比丘们,对于愚人,当以那样的方式显现时,愚人便这样想。显示巴利原文
Bālaṃ pīṭhasamāruḷhantiādīni sāmiatthe upayogavacanāni. Kāyena duccaritānīti kāyena duṭṭhu katāni. Olabbhantīti avalambanti avatthariyanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Olambanādiākārena hi tāni upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahatanti mahantānaṃ. Pathaviyaṃ olambantīti pathavitale pattharanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pattharaṇākāroyeva hesa. Tatra, bhikkhave, bālassāti tasmiṃ upaṭṭhahanākāre bālassa evaṃ hoti.
“比丘们,你们的获得”——比丘们,你们所获得的这些人身、获得信心等,是你们的获得,确实是获得。“善得”指出家后成就四遍清净戒等所得,那也是善得。“你们得到了时机”即远离八无暇,这第九种时机已获,为住于道梵行。以“我所见”等作部分例示,说明八无暇。显示巴利原文
Lābhāvo, bhikkhaveti bhikkhave, ye ime tumhehi paṭiladdhā manussattasaddhāpaṭilābhādayo, lābhā vo tumhākaṃ lābhā eva. Suladdhanti yampidaṃ pabbajitvā catupārisuddhisīlādisampādanaṃ laddhaṃ, tampi suladdhaṃ. Khaṇo vo paṭiladdhoti aṭṭhaakkhaṇavajjito navamoyaṃ khaṇo paṭiladdho maggabrahmacariyavāsāya. ‘‘Diṭṭhā mayā’’tiādinā ekadesanidassanena aṭṭha akkhaṇe vibhāveti.
“无论去往哪一恶趣”:“无论他去往哪一种恶趣”的意思。“那个非法”:即那个被实行的非法,指那个行非法的人。“杀害”:即损害。显示巴利原文
Yahiṃ yahinti yaṃ yaṃ duggatiṃ yo gacchati. So naṃ adhammoti yo adhammo tena carito, so naṃ adhammacāriṃ puggalaṃ. Hanātīti bādhati.
“少力量”:少威力。“丑陋”:畸形、可厌。“无智”:无慧,由无因结生而成为如羊般的哑者。显示巴利原文
Appesakkhatāti appānubhāvatā. Dubbaṇṇatāti virūpatā bībhacchatā. Duppaññatāti nippaññatā ahetukapaṭisandhivasena eḷamūgatā.
“护语者”指通过避免四种语恶行而保护语言的人。“意善防护”指通过不生贪欲等,让心意善加防护。舍弃杀生等,不以身作不善,应净化这三种业道。如此净化者,就能成就由寻求戒蕴等的佛陀等仙人们所开示的圣八支道。“无恶作”指没有以身、语、意所做的、有罪过的、招苦果的、导致堕恶趣的业。“以三处防护”指以此三因,通过阻止身恶行等的进入而防护,我称这种人为“婆罗门”。显示巴利原文
Vācānurakkhīti catunnaṃ vacīduccaritānaṃ parivajjanena vācānurakkhī. Abhijjhādīnaṃ anuppādanena manasā suṭṭhu saṃvuto. Pāṇātipātādayo pajahanto kāyena ca akusalaṃ na kayirā, ete tayo kammapathe visodhaye. Evaṃ visodhento hi sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esakehi buddhādīhi isīhi paveditaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ ārādheyyāti. Dukkaṭanti kāyena vācāya manasā ca dukkaṭaṃ sāvajjaṃ dukkhudrayaṃ duggatisaṃvattaniyaṃ kammaṃ yassa natthi. Saṃvutaṃ tīhiṭhānehīti etehi tīhi kāraṇehi kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ pavesanivāraṇato pihitaṃ, taṃ ahaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇa’’nti vadāmīti.
“完全无戒者”即彻底的无戒状态。在家人从出生起就作十不善业道,或出家人从受具足戒之日起犯重罪,称为完全无戒者。但这里指在两三个有身中无戒者,针对他从前世趣中带来的无戒状态而说。而“无戒状态”应理解为无戒者依六门而生起的渴爱。“如蔓藤覆盖婆罗树”即对那个人来说,那个称为渴爱的无戒。正如蔓藤覆盖了婆罗树,天下雨时以叶遮水,通过破坏的方式完全缠绕,同样,覆盖有身后完全缠绕而住,他如同被蔓藤破坏而倒地的树,被那称为无戒的渴爱破坏后,堕入恶趣。即如希望他不利益的敌人所愿,他使自己变成那样。显示巴利原文
Accantadussīlyanti ekantadussīlabhāvo. Gihī vāpi jātito paṭṭhāya dasa akusalakammapathe karonto, pabbajito vāpi upasampannadivasato paṭṭhāya garukāpattiṃ āpajjamāno accantadussīlo nāma. Idha pana yo dvīsu tīsu attabhāvesu dussīlo, tassa gatiyā āgataṃ dussīlabhāvaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Dussīlabhāvoti cettha dussīlassa cha dvārāni nissāya uppannā taṇhā veditabbā. Māluvā sālamivotthatanti yassa puggalassa taṃ taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ. Yathā nāma māluvā sālaṃ otthataṃ deve vassante pattehi udakaṃ paṭicchitvā saṃbhañjanavasena sabbatthakameva pariyonandhati, evaṃ attabhāvaṃ otthataṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ so māluvāya saṃbhañjitvā bhūmiyaṃ pātiyamāno rukkho viya tāya dussīlyasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya saṃbhañjitvā apāyesu pātiyamāno, yathā naṃ anatthakāmo diso icchati, tathā attānaṃ karoti nāmāti attho.
“Attanā hi kata”这首偈颂的简略意义是:犹如钻石,即由石所生、由石而成的宝石,将自己所从生的石——也就是名为“生处”的宝石原石——咬碎,令其变得千疮百孔、支离破碎而无法受用;同样地,自己所造、生于自身、源于自身的恶,在四恶趣中折磨、削割、毁坏那个没有智慧、缺少明辨的人。显示巴利原文
‘‘Attanā hi kata’’nti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yathā pāsāṇamayaṃ pāsāṇasambhavaṃ vajiraṃ tameva asmamayaṃ maṇiṃ attano uṭṭhānaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ pāsāṇamaṇiṃ khāyitvā chiddāchiddaṃ khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ katvā aparibhogaṃ karoti, evamevaṃ attanā kataṃ attani jātaṃ attasambhavaṃ pāpaṃ dummedhaṃ nippaññaṃ puggalaṃ catūsu apāyesu abhimatthati kantati viddhaṃsetīti.
“习近”即造作了。“应呵责”指应被呵责的。“愚慧”指慧钝的。“由于业尽”,即凭借能尽业的智慧,通过舍断业。“心解脱”,指因断除的解脱与止息的解脱而心善解脱。“他们熄灭,如火焰因燃料尽而熄灭”:正如无执取的火焰熄灭,同样地,由诸行所构成的识无余灭尽而熄灭。显示巴利原文
Niseviyāti katvā. Garahāti gārayhā. Bālamatīti mandabuddhino. Khayā ca kammassāti kammakkhayakarañāṇena kammassa khepanato. Vimuttacetasoti samucchedavimuttiyā paṭippassaddhivimuttiyā ca vimuttacitto. Nibbanti te jotirivindhanakkhayāti yathā nāma anupādāno jātavedo nibbāyati, evamevaṃ abhisaṅkhārassa viññāṇassa anavasesakkhayā nibbāyati.
123 “123.”是章节或注释的编号,本身并无实义。显示巴利原文
123.
“如蜜蜂”此偈中,“蜜蜂”指任何种类的酿蜜蜂。所谓“花”,即在花园飞行时,不伤害、不损害花及其色与香而飞行。如此飞行之后,取蜜离去:谓饮足花蜜后,更为日后酿蜜而取蜜飞离。它进入密林,将带有花粉的蜜存放于树洞等处,渐次酿成甘蜜。花园中的花、色、香并不因彼飞行而消失,花仍如其本然。同样,“如是,牟尼应于村中行”:无论有学或无学的非家牟尼,依家次第,于村中乞食而行。信心与财富不因他在村中行乞而减损,信心与财富仍如其本然。如此行已,出村,于村外择一有水便利处,敷设僧伽帝而坐,依车轴涂油喻、疮药喻、子肉喻来观察,受用团食;然后进入那样的丛林,将内在的业处取为所缘而作意,令道果现前。无学的牟尼,则致力于现法安乐住。这便是他与酿蜜蜂的相似处。此处所说,乃是漏尽者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathāpi bhamaro’’ti gāthāyaṃ bhamaroti yā kāci madhukarajāti. Pupphanti pupphārāme caranto pupphañca tassa vaṇṇañca gandhañca aheṭhayaṃ aheṭhayanto avināsento caratīti attho. Evaṃ caritvā ca paleti rasamādāyāti yāvadatthaṃ rasaṃ pivitvā aparampi madhukaraṇatthāya rasaṃ gahetvā ḍeti. So ekaṃ vanagahanaṃ ajjhogāhetvā rukkhasusirādīsu taṃ rajamissakaṃ rasaṃ ṭhapetvā anupubbena madhurarasaṃ madhuṃ karoti, na tassa pupphārāme caritapaccayā pupphaṃ vā tassa vaṇṇo vā gandho vā vinassati, atha kho pupphaṃ pākatikameva hoti. Evaṃ gāme munī careti evaṃ sekkho asekkho vā anagāriyamuni kulapaṭipāṭiyā gāme bhikkhaṃ gaṇhanto careyyāti attho. Na hi tassa gāme caraṇapaccayā saddhāhāni vā bhogahāni vā hoti, saddhāpi bhogāpi pākatikāva honti. Evaṃ caritvā ca pana gāmato nikkhamitvā bahigāme udakaphāsukaṭṭhāne saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā nisinno akkhabhañjana- (mi. pa. 6.1.2) vaṇalepanaputtamaṃsūpamavasena (mi. pa. 6.1.2; saṃ. ni. 2.63) paccavekkhanto piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā tathārūpaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ anupavisitvā ajjhattikakammaṭṭhānaṃ sammasanto maggaphalāni hatthagatāneva karoti. Asekkhamuni pana diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāramanuyuñjati. Ayamassa bhamarena madhukarena sarikkhatā. Khīṇāsavo panettha adhippetoti.
“住于巴帝摩卡律仪防护”:凡守护他、保护他,能令其解脱地狱等苦的,即称为巴帝摩卡。此巴帝摩卡本身,因能防护、遮止身、语的违犯,故名为律仪。他具足此巴帝摩卡律仪,于一切威仪路中安住而行。“戒行与行处具足”:即戒行具足,行处亦具足。“于微细”者,指细小的对象。“罪过”即不善法。“见怖畏”:于彼微细罪过亦能见到怖畏。“于学处受持而学”:对诸学处中凡所应学者,悉皆如法受持修学。显示巴利原文
Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatīti yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti pātimokkho. So eva kāyikavācasikassa vītikkamassa saṃvaraṇato pidahanato saṃvaro. Tena pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvuto samannāgato hutvā sabbiriyāpathesu carati. Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ca gocarena ca sampanno. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayaṃ dassī. Samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti sikkhāpadesu yaṃ kiñci sikkhitabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ sammā ādiyitvā sikkhati.
“具足善的身业、语业,活命清净者”:此处,虽由“戒行与行处具足”已摄持了善的身业与语业,然此活命遍净戒非于虚空等处生起,唯依身、语二门而生起,为显示其生起之门,故说“具足善的身业、语业”。又因其具足于此,故为活命清净者;为显示活命遍净即是戒,故作是说。此亦如是曾被宣说:“木匠!云何为善戒?善的身业、善的语业,木匠!我说此活命清净亦是戒。”(《中部·木匠经》)“勤策精进者”:凡已策发身精进与心精进之人,称为勤策精进者。其中,远离人群的聚会,于四威仪中依八种策励事独住,此人的身精进名为已策发。远离内心的聚会,依八等至而独住,于行、住、坐、卧等一切时,将已生的烦恼于生处镇伏,令禅那生起者,此人的心精进名为已策发。如是即勤策精进者。“有力量者”即具备安住之力者。“坚固精勤者”即精勤稳坚者。“不弃置责任……为证得”:为断除染污法,为成就清净法,为现证涅槃,不弃舍责任,精勤策进而住。“具慧者”:具足能把握五蕴生灭的智慧者。显示巴利原文
Kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato, kusalena parisuddhājīvoti ettha ācāragocaraggahaṇeneva kusale kāyakamme vacīkamme ca gahitepi yasmā idaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ na ākāsādīsu uppajjati, kāyavacīdvāresu eva pana uppajjati, tasmā tassa uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ ‘‘kāyavacīkammena samannāgato, kusalenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvo, ājīvapārisuddhipi sīlamevāti dassanatthaṃ etaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘katame ca thapati kusalā sīlā? Kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ kusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ, parisuddhaṃ ājīvampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.265). Āraddhavīriyoti yassa kāyikaṃ cetasikañca vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ hoti, so ‘‘āraddhavīriyo’’ti vuccati. Tattha yo gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā catūsu iriyāpathesu aṭṭhaārambhavatthuvasena ekako hoti, tassa kāyikaṃ vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ nāma hoti. Yo cittasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā aṭṭhasamāpattivasena ekako hoti, gamanādīsu uppannakilesaṃ uppannaṭṭhāneyeva niggaṇhitvā jhānaṃ nibbatteti, tassa cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ nāma hoti. Evaṃ āraddhavīriyo. Thāmavāti ṭhitimā. Daḷhaparakkamoti thiraparakkamo. Anikkhittadhuro…pe… sacchikiriyāyāti saṃkilesadhammānaṃ pahānatthaṃ vodānadhammānaṃ sampādanatthaṃ , paccakkhakaraṇatthañca dhuraṃ anikkhipitvā vīriyaṃ ussukkāpento viharati. Paññavāti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayapariggāhikāya paññāya samannāgato. Tenāha ‘‘udayatthagāminiyā’’ti.
没有与儿子相等的爱:父母即使对丑陋的亲生儿子,也视如金色雕像,视若花鬘,放在头上等处加以爱护。即使被儿子便溺污身,他们也如接受涂香般心生欢喜。因此说“没有与儿子相等的爱”,意思是没有任何爱能与对儿子的爱相等。没有与牛相等的财富:没有任何财富能与牛相提并论。没有与太阳相等的光明:没有任何光明能与太阳相比。以大海为最上:一切所谓的湖泊,都以大海为最上,大海是其中最为殊胜的;没有任何水的聚集能与大海相似。世尊如此说。显示巴利原文
Natthi puttasamaṃ pemanti mātāpitaro virūpepi attano puttake suvaṇṇabimbakaṃ viya maññanti mālāguḷe viya sīsādīsu katvā pariharamānā. Tehi uhaditāpi omuttitāpi gandhavilepanaṃ paṭicchantā viya somanassaṃ āpajjanti. Tenāha – ‘‘natthi puttasamaṃ pema’’nti. Puttapemena samaṃ pemaṃ nāma natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Gosamitanti gohi samaṃ godhanasadisaṃ aññaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi. Sūriyasamā ābhāti sūriyābhāya samā aññā ābhā nāma natthi. Samuddaparamāti ye keci aññe sarā nāma, sabbe te samuddaparamā. Samuddo tesaṃ uttamo, samuddasadisaṃ aññaṃ udakaṃ nidānaṃ nāma natthi bhagavāti vadati.
然而,没有任何爱能与爱自己相比。父母即使抛弃儿女,不去养育他们,也会养育自己。没有与谷物相等的财富:因为在饥荒时节,为了获取谷物,就连金银、牛和水牛等也会被拿到谷物主人那里去。没有与慧相等的光明:太阳等只能照亮一方,只能驱散当下的黑暗;而智慧却能令一万世界同时明亮,并能破除覆蔽过去、未来等的黑暗。没有与雨相等的湖泊:无论是河流还是湖泊,都无法与降雨相比。因为若降雨中断,大海中连一指节深的水也不会增加;而若持续降雨,乃至光音天也会变成一片汪洋。因此,世尊为了驳斥天人的言论,说出答偈:“没有与爱自己相等的爱”等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana attapemena samaṃ pemaṃ natthi. Mātāpitaro hi chaḍḍetvāpi puttadhītaro aposetvā attānameva posenti. Dhaññena ca samaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi. Tathārūpe hi kāle hiraññasuvaṇṇādīnipi gomahiṃsādīnipi dhaññaggahaṇatthaṃ dhaññasāmikānameva santikaṃ gahetvā gacchanti. Paññāya ca samā ābhā nāma natthi. Sūriyādayo hi ekadesaṃyeva obhāsenti, paccuppannameva ca tamaṃ vinodenti, paññā pana dasasahassimpi lokadhātuṃ ekapajjotaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, atītaṃsādipaṭicchādakañca tamaṃ vidhamati. Meghavuṭṭhiyā ca samo saro nāma natthi. Nadī vā hi hotu taḷākādīni vā, vuṭṭhisamo saro nāma natthi. Meghavuṭṭhiyā hi pacchinnāya mahāsamudde aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṃ na hoti, vuṭṭhiyā pana pavattamānāya yāva ābhassarabhavanāpi ekodakaṃ hoti. Tasmā bhagavā devatāvacanaṃ paṭikkhipanavasena paṭigāthaṃ vadanto ‘‘natthi attasamaṃ pema’’ntiādimāha.
“今何为所怖”:即为何而怖畏。“道被说为种种因缘”:依三十八所缘,道以种种因缘被演说。既然如此,此大众因何而怖畏,执取了六十二种见?这是他的意思。“广慧者”:即多慧、智慧广溢之人。“于他世而不怖”:从此世间前往他世时,不怀怖畏。显示巴利原文
Kiṃsūdha bhītāti kiṃ nu bhītā. Maggo canekāyatano pavuttoti aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇavasena anekehi kāraṇehi maggo kathito, evaṃ sante kissa bhītā hutvā ayaṃ janatā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo aggahesīti vadati. Bhūripaññāti bahupañña ussannapañña. Paralokaṃ na bhāyeti imasmā lokā paralokaṃ gacchanto na bhāyeyya.
“安立”:即安置、确立。“住于家”:如给孤独长者等,安住在饮食丰足的家中。“能分施者”:指即使是以手抓取的食物,也能用指甲剖开先分与他人,而后自己才食用的习行之人。“了知言词者”:指了知乞求者通过乞求所说出的言词,或指堪受称赞之人。在此,“语”包含了四种善语业,“意”包含了三种善意业,“以身”包含了三种善身业——这十善业道名为“前清净支”。“具有丰富饮食而住于家”这一句,包含了祭祀的资具。“有信”是一支,“柔和”是一支,“能分施”是一支,“了知言词”是一支,为显示这四法而说“住于此四种法”。显示巴利原文
Paṇidhāyāti ṭhapetvā. Gharamāvasantoti anāthapiṇḍikādayo viya bahvannapāne ghare vasanto. Saṃvibhāgīti accharāya gahitampi nakhena phāletvā parassa datvāva bhuñjanasīlo. Vadaññūti yācakānaṃ yācanavasena vuttavacanaññū, vacanīyo vā. Ettha ca vācanti cattāri vacīsucaritāni gahitāni. Mananti tīṇi manosucaritāni. Kāyenāti tīṇi kāyasucaritāni. Ime dasa kusalakammapathā pubbasuddhiaṅgaṃ nāma. ‘‘Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto’’ti iminā yaññaupakkharo gahito. Saddhoti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, mudūti ekaṃ, saṃvibhāgīti ekaṃ, vadaññūti ekanti imāni cattāri aṅgāni sandhāya ‘‘etesu dhammesu ṭhito catūsū’’ti āha.
另一种解释方法:“语”等三项为一支;由“具有丰富饮食”这一句所包含的祭祀资具,为一支;“有信、柔和、能分施、了知言词”则合为一支。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – ‘‘vāca’’ntiādīni tīṇi aṅgāni, ‘‘bahvannapāna’’nti iminā yaññaupakkharova gahito, ‘‘saddho mudu saṃvibhāgī vadaññū’’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ.
另有一种名为“二支法”的解说:“语与意”为一支;“以身不行恶,多获饮食而居家”为一支;“具信、柔和”为一支;“乐施、善辩”为一支。安住于此四法者,即名为住于法。他从此世前往他世,无所畏惧。显示巴利原文
Aparo dukanayo nāma hoti – ‘‘vācaṃ manañcā’’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘kāyena pāpāni akubbamāno bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saddho mudū’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saṃvibhāgī vadaññū’’ti ekanti etesu catūsu dhammesu ṭhito dhamme ṭhito nāma hoti. So ito paralokaṃ gacchantona bhāyati.
“身行”等是说明巴帝摩卡律仪。其中,“以两种”即由两种方式,意为分为两类。“应知”即应当了知。而所谓的“戒论”,应依业道而说,或依施设而说。若依业道来说,不应修习的身行,当以杀生、不与取、邪淫来说明;若依施设来说,则当以违犯身门所施设的学处来说明。应修习的身行,当以远离杀生等,以及不违犯身门所施设的学处来说明。显示巴利原文
Kāyasamācārampītiādi pātimokkhasaṃvaradassanaṃ. Tattha duvidhenāti dvividhena, dvīhi koṭṭhāsehīti attho. Jaññāti jāneyya. Sīlakathā ca nāmesā kammapathavasena vā paṇṇattivasena vā kathetabbā. Tattha kammapathavasena tāva kathentena asevitabbakāyasamācāro pāṇātipātādinnādānamicchācārehi kathetabbo. Paṇṇattivasena kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamavasena. Sevitabbakāyasamācāro pāṇātipātādiveramaṇīhi ceva kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadaavītikkamena ca kathetabbo.
不应修习的语行,当以妄语等语恶行,以及违犯语门所施设的学处来说明。应修习的语行,当以远离妄语等,以及不违犯语门所施设的学处来说明。显示巴利原文
Asevitabbavacīsamācāro musāvādādivacīduccaritena ceva vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamena ca kathetabbo. Sevitabbavacīsamācāro musāvādādiveramaṇīhi ceva vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadaavītikkamena ca kathetabbo.
“寻求”是指以身与语进行的寻求。它虽已通过摄持身行与语行而被包含,然而,由于称为“活命第八戒”的戒仅在这两门中生起,不在空中生起,因此,为显示该戒而另作解说。其中,不应修习的寻求,当以非圣寻求来说明;应修习的寻求,当以圣寻求来说明。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,什么是非圣寻求?在此,诸比丘,有一类人自身有生法,却只寻求有生法……”(《中部》)以及:“诸比丘,什么是圣寻求?在此,诸比丘,有一类人自身有生法,了知有生法的过患后,寻求无生、无上、安稳的涅槃……”(《中部》)。显示巴利原文
Pariyesanā pana kāyavācāhi pariyesanā eva, sā kāyavacīsamācāraggahaṇena gahitāpi yasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ nāma etasmiṃyeva dvāradvaye uppajjati, na ākāse, tasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīladassanatthaṃ visuṃ vuttā. Tattha nasevitabbapariyesanā anariyapariyesanāya kathetabbā, sevitabbapariyesanā ariyapariyesanāya. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘katamā ca, bhikkhave, anariyapariyesanā? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhammaṃyeva pariyesatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.274). Tathā ‘‘katamā ca, bhikkhave, ariyapariyesanā? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhamme ādīnavaṃ viditvā ajātaṃ anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ nibbānaṃ pariyesatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.275).
「Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko」(八支道):无论是“腿路”等世间路,还是六十二种恶见之路,对于这一切路,八支道以正见等八支,舍弃邪见等八种恶法,以灭为所缘,在四圣谛中成就遍知苦等作用,是为最上、最殊胜。
「Saccānaṃ caturo padā」(四谛之句):无论是《法句经》224颂“应说真实语,不应生气”所说的语真实,或是“真实的婆罗门、真实的刹帝利”等类的世俗谛,或是“只有这是真实,其他是虚妄”的见谛,或是《经集》等所说的“真实只有一个,没有第二个”的究竟谛,在这一切真实当中,具有应遍知、应断、应证、应修、同一证悟、如实证悟等义的“苦圣谛”等四句,称为最胜。
「Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ」 (离欲是诸法中最上):如说“比显示巴利原文
Maggānaṭṭhaṅgikoti jaṅghamaggādayo vā hontu dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatamaggā vā, sabbesampi maggānaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīhi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi micchādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahānakaro nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā catūsupi saccesu dukkhaparijānanādikiccaṃ sādhayamāno aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo seṭṭho uttamo. Saccānaṃ caturo padāti ‘‘saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyā’’ti (dha. pa. 224) āgataṃ vacīsaccaṃ vā hotu, ‘‘sacco brāhmaṇo, sacco khattiyo’’tiādibhedaṃ sammutisaccaṃ vā, ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 3.331; udā. 54; mahāni. 20) diṭṭhisaccaṃ vā, ‘‘ekañhi saccaṃ na dutiyamatthī’’ti (su. ni. 890; mahāni. 119) vuttaṃ paramatthasaccaṃ vā hotu. Sabbesampi imesaṃ saccānaṃ parijānitabbaṭṭhena pahātabbaṭṭhena sacchikātabbaṭṭhena bhāvetabbaṭṭhena ekapaṭivedhaṭṭhena tathapaṭivedhaṭṭhena ca ‘‘dukkhaṃ ariyasacca’’ntiādayo (mahāva. 14; dī. ni. 2.387; ma. ni. 1.120) caturo padā seṭṭhā nāma. Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānanti ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; 5.32; itivu. 90) vacanato nibbānasaṅkhāto virāgo sabbadhammānaṃ seṭṭho. Dvipadānañca cakkhumāti sabbesampi devamanussādibhedānaṃ dvipadānaṃ pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā bhagavāva seṭṭhoti.
“Aggāni”意为最上。“Yāvatā”意为所有。“Apadā”指无足类,如蛇、鱼等。“Dvipadā”指两足类,如人、鸟等。“Catuppadā”指四足类,如象、马等。“Bahuppadā”指多足类,如百足虫等。“Rūpino”指欲界与色界的有色众生。“Asaññino”指生于无想有的众生。“Nevasaññīnāsaññino”指生于有顶(非想非非想处)的众生。“Aggamakkhāyatī”是说,以功德而被称为最上、最高、最殊胜。显示巴利原文
Aggānīti uttamāni. Yāvatāti yattakā. Apadāti nippadā ahimacchādayo. Dvipadāti manussapakkhijātādayo. Catuppadāti hatthiassādayo . Bahuppadāti satapadiādayo. Rūpinoti kāmāvacararūpāvacarasattā. Asaññinoti asaññībhave nibbattasattā. Nevasaññīnāsaññinoti bhavagge nibbattasattā. Aggamakkhāyatīti guṇehi aggo uttamo seṭṭho akkhāyati.
“Asaṅkhatānaṃ”指无为,也就是涅槃。“Virāgo”等也都是涅槃的名称。因为依止涅槃,一切烦恼得以离染;一切贪、慢等狂妄被降伏,归于无有;一切渴爱得到调伏;一切执著被根除;轮转中断;渴爱耗尽;一切热恼止息;轮转之苦熄灭、寂灭。因此,它获得这些名称。显示巴利原文
Asaṅkhatānanti nibbānameva vuttaṃ. Virāgotiādīni ca nibbānasseva nāmāni. Tañhi āgamma sabbe kilesā virajjanti, sabbe rāgamadādayo madā nimmadā honti abhāvaṃ gacchanti , sabbā pipāsā vinayaṃ upenti, sabbe ālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, vaṭṭāni upacchijjanti, taṇhā khīyati, sabbapariḷāhā vūpasammanti, vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nirujjhati nibbāyati. Tasmā taṃ etāni nāmāni labhatīti.
“Dhammo ca kusalakkhato”:那位导师的法是善的、无过失的;正因为无过失,所以不被贪等烦恼以及一切外道言论所破坏。“Tāni tīṇi visissare”:这三宝在世间胜过一切宝物,意思是,它们以功德而超胜一切世间。显示巴利原文
Dhammo ca kusalakkhatoti tassa satthuno dhammo ca kusalo anavajjo, anavajjattā eva paṭipakkhehi rāgādīhi kilesehi sabbatitthiyavādehi ca aparikkhato. Tāni tīṇi visissareti etāni tīṇi ratanāni loke sabbaratanehi visissanti guṇavasena sabbalokaṃ atisentīti attho.
“沙门莲花众”:指如同莲花般的圣沙门之聚集。因“莲花”即具足圆满百瓣的莲花之名,而圣者亦于一切方面圆满功德,故说如同莲花。“为智者所恭敬”:即被智者所恭敬。“最上调伏者”:意为最上之人、能调伏人者、导师。“世间之上”:住于世间之上,即于一切世间中最上。显示巴利原文
Samaṇapadumasañcayo gaṇoti padumasadisānaṃ ariyasamaṇānaṃ samūhasaṅkhāto gaṇo. Padumanti hi paripuṇṇasatapattassa saroruhassa nāmaṃ. Ariyapuggalā ca sabbathāpi paripuṇṇaguṇāti padumasadisā vuttā. Vidūnaṃ sakkatoti vidūhi paṇḍitehi sakkato. Naravaradamakoti naravaro ca purisānaṃ damako nāyako cāti attho. Lokassa uttarīti lokassa upari ṭhitāni, sabbaloke uttamānīti attho.
“无恼害”:指没有贪等热恼的随行,即无恼害。“真实名”:不虚妄的名称,以如实功德而得名。“胜一切”:以自己的功德征服一切世间而安住。“真实法”:因从轮回中绝对出离,故不虚妄;它与教法一同,是九种出世间法,因此无有更超胜于彼者。“圣僧伽”:恒时为一切智者所恭敬。显示巴利原文
Nirupadāhoti rāgapariḷāhādīhi anupadāho. Saccanāmoti avitathanāmo yathābhuccaguṇehi āgatanāmo. Sabbābhibhūti sabbalokaṃ attano guṇehi abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Saccadhammoti vaṭṭato ekantanissaraṇabhāvena avitatho saha pariyattiyā navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo, tato eva natthañño tassa uttarīti tassa uttari adhikaguṇo añño ca dhammo natthīti attho. Ariyasaṅghova niccaṃ sabbakālaṃ vidūhi sabbapaṇḍitehi pūjito.
在“一乘道”这首偈中,“一乘道”意为一条道。因为道有——显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekāyana’’nti gāthāya ekāyananti ekaṃ maggaṃ. Maggassa hi –
「Maggo(道)、pantho(路)、patho(途)、pajjo(径)、añjasaṃ(路)、vaṭumāyanaṃ(道途)、
“船、度桥、筏、浮囊、津渡”。(《小部·彼岸道赞偈广说》101)——像这样有许多名称。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Maggo pantho patho pajjo, añjasaṃ vaṭumāyanaṃ; Nāvā uttarasetu ca, kullo ca bhisi saṅgamo’’ti. (cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 101) –
虽有众多名称,但此处以“行道”之名称说。因此,“一乘”意为独一之道,而非分岔为两条的路。或者,应当由一个人独自行走,故称一乘:这是指舍弃聚会杂众,以远离的意义独处而修习。或者,因依此而行,故称行道:即从轮回前往涅槃。或者,这是唯一者的行道,即一切众生中最殊胜的世尊的行道。虽然他人也确实由此而行,但此道实属世尊,因由他所生起。正如经中所说:“婆罗门!彼世尊乃是未生起之道的生起者”等等。或者,行道的意思是行走、转起。唯有在这样的法与律中才有这种行道,其他地方没有,故称一乘。正如所说:“须跋陀罗!在此法与律中,能获得八支圣道。”另外,虽然先前阶段以种种方式修习,但后阶段唯趣向唯一的涅槃,故称一乘,即那一乘。显示巴利原文
Bahūni nāmāni, svāyaṃ idha ayananāmena vutto. Tasmā ekāyananti ekamaggaṃ, na dvedhāpathabhūtanti attho. Atha vā ekena ayitabbanti ekāyanaṃ. Gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya vivekaṭṭhena pavivittena paṭipajjitabbanti attho. Ayanti vā etenāti ayano, saṃsārato nibbānaṃ gacchantīti attho. Ekassa vā sabbasattaseṭṭhassa bhagavato ayanoti ekāyano. Kiñcāpi hi tena aññepi ayanti, tathāpi bhagavatova so ayano, tena uppāditattā. Yathāha – ‘‘so hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.79). Ayatīti vā ayano, gacchati pavattatīti attho. Ekasmiṃ imasmiṃyeva dhammavinaye ayano, na aññatthāti ekāyano. Yathāha – ‘‘imasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). Api ca pubbabhāge nānāmukhabhāvanāya pavattopi aparabhāge ekaṃ nibbānameva ayati gacchatīti ekāyano, taṃ ekāyanaṃ.
「见生灭尽者」(Jātikhayantadassī):以生的灭尽为边际,名为“生灭尽”;见到以生的究竟灭尽为边际的涅槃者,即是“见生灭尽者”。另有一种读法作「他了知道,为利益悲悯者」(Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī),意思是:世尊以自觉智了知上述那种称为一乘的道,了知的同时,又以种种利益哀愍众生。现在,为阐明此道的一乘性及三时中必定出离的特质,而说:「以此道,过去已渡,未来当渡,现今正在渡越瀑流」(etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha)。这句话的意思是:过去长久劫中已渡越欲瀑流等四种瀑流者,未来长久劫中将渡越者,以及现在正在渡越者,他们全都依于此道,而非依于其他道。「希求清净者」(Visuddhipekkhā):指希求通过渡越四种瀑流而达至绝对清净的涅槃者,也就是愿般涅槃的人。显示巴利原文
Jātikhayantadassīti jātiyā khayasaṅkhāto anto jātikhayanto. Jātiyā accantakhayanto nibbānaṃ, taṃ passīti jātikhayantadassī. ‘‘Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī’’tipi pāṭho. Tassattho – vuttappakāraṃ ekāyanasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ sayambhuñāṇena bhagavā pajānāti, jānanto ca tena tena hitena satte anukampatīti. Idāni tassa maggassa ekāyanabhāvaṃ, tīsupi kālesu ekantaniyyānatañca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti āha. Tassattho – ye atītamaddhānaṃ kāmoghādicatubbidhaṃ oghaṃ tariṃsu, ye taṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ tarissanti, etarahi ca taranti, te sabbe eteneva maggena, na aññenāti. Visuddhipekkhāti caturoghanittharaṇena accantavisuddhiṃ nibbānaṃ apekkhantā, parinibbāyitukāmāti attho.
这样,在引用种种经句分别解说教法的两种安立之后,现在为了联系杂染分等来显示,又提出“世间经”(lokiyaṃ sutta)等语。其中,“与见道分(dassanabhāgiya)和修道分(bhāvanābhāgiya)”即指抉择分(nibbedhabhāgiya),因为正是抉择分被分为见道分与修道分两方面来显示。又,“世间与出世间(lokiyañca lokuttarañca)经”意指:世间经与出世间经,应通过杂染分等及见道分等这两类来指称。“在哪部经中……”等,是显示指称的方式。其中,“杂染分”(saṃkilesabhāgiya)指与杂染相关的,即阐明杂染的义理。对其余部分,也应同样理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ duvidhampi sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nānāsuttapadāni udāharantena vibhajitvā idāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi saṃsanditvā dassetuṃ puna ‘‘lokiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha dassanabhāgiyena ca bhāvanābhāgiyena cāti nibbedhabhāgiyena. Nibbedhabhāgiyameva hi dassanabhāgiyaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyanti dvidhā bhinditvā dassitaṃ. Lokiyañca lokuttarañcāti lokiyaṃ lokuttarañca suttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi dassanabhāgiyādīhi cāti ubhayehi niddisitabbanti adhippāyo. Yasmiṃ suttetiādi niddisanākāradassanaṃ. Tattha saṃkilesabhāgiyanti saṃkilesakoṭṭhāsasahitaṃ, saṃkilesatthadīpananti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi.
这样,显示了世间三类与“杂染分”等四句的关联之后,以此类推,其余三类与其余各句的关联便容易了知,故而未再别出。为显示对杂染分等的超越,说“习气分经”等。此处,虽“杂染分经”与“习气分经”同属世间经,但为了表明:正如出世间经那样,世间经中的习气分经意在“超越”杂染分,故说“习气分经是为舍离杂染分经”。其中,“舍离”即指为“断除”。于此,当知是以该经的标题涵盖其经义。并且,如同清净诸法超越杂染诸法,修习地也必须通过见地的超越才能证得,因此说“修道分经是为舍离见道分经”。然而,当无学诸法生起后,所谓“道修习”的作用便不复存在;乃至禅那的修习,也只是为了“现法安乐住”的目的,故说:“无学分经是为舍离修道分经,而无学分经是为现法安乐住”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ lokiyattikassa saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi catūhi padehi saṃsandanaṃ dassetvā iminā nayena sesatikānaṃ sesapadānañca saṃsandanaṃ suviññeyyanti taṃ anuddharitvā saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ samatikkamanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yadipi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ lokiyameva. Tathāpi lokuttarasuttāni viya lokiyasuttānaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyassa samatikkamāya hotīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyassa suttassa nigghātāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha nigghātāyāti pahānāya. Suttasīsena cettha suttattho gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā ca vodānadhammā viya saṃkilesadhammānaṃ dassanabhūmisamatikkamaneneva bhāvanābhūmi adhigantabbā, tasmā ‘‘bhāvanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ dassanabhāgiyassa suttassa paṭinissaggāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana asekkhadhammesu uppannesu maggabhāvanākiccaṃ nāma natthi. Jhānabhāvanāpi diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthā eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyassa suttassa paṭinissaggāya, asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārattha’’nti ca vuttaṃ.
现在,为以三聚的句式进行关联并显示,而说「出世间」等。于「一种子者」等之中:凡成为入流者后,仅再生起一次有身便证得阿拉汉果的人,名为「一种子者」。如所说:显示巴利原文
Idāni tikapadeheva saṃsanditvā dassetuṃ ‘‘lokuttara’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ekabījinātiādīsu yo sotāpanno hutvā ekameva attabhāvaṃ janetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ ekabījī nāma. Yathāha –
「什么样的人称为一种子者?此处,有一类人由彻底断除三结而成为入流者,成为不退堕法者,决定以正觉为归宿。他仅生起一次人间之生存后,便尽苦的边际。这个人便称为一种子者。」(《人施设论》33)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo ekabījī? Idhekacco puggalo tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo. So ekaṃyeva mānusakaṃ bhavaṃ nibbattetvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ekabījī’’ti (pu. pa. 33).
另凡流转经过两个或三个家之后,尽苦边际的人,便名为「家家者」。如所说:显示巴利原文
Yo pana dve vā tīṇi vā kulāni sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ kolaṃkolo nāma. Yathāha –
什么样的人称为家家者呢?在此,有一种人,彻底断除三结……(中略)……以正觉为归宿。他流转经过两个或三个家之后,便尽苦边际。这个人便称为家家者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo kolaṃkolo? Idhekacco puggalo tiṇṇaṃ…pe… parāyaṇo. So dve vā tīṇi vā kulāni sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo kolaṃkolo’’ti (pu. pa. 32).
在此,「家」是指「生存」。所谓「两个或三个」,在这里只是开示的说法罢了。即使流转到第六有,也仍属家家者。显示巴利原文
Tattha kulānīti bhave. Dve vā tīṇi vāti idamettha desanāmattameva. Yāva chaṭṭhabhavā saṃsarantopi kolaṃkolo hoti eva.
而经过七有流转之后,尽苦边际的人,便名为「极七次者」。如所说:显示巴利原文
Yo pana satta bhave saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ sattakkhattuparamo nāma. Yathāha –
什么样的人称为极七次者呢?在此,有一类人……(中略)……以正觉为归宿。他在天界与人界之间流转轮回七次之后,便尽诸苦边际。这样的人便称为极七次者。(《人施设论》31)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo sattakkhattuparamo? Idhekacco…pe… parāyaṇo. So sattakkhattuṃ deve ceva mānuse ca sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo sattakkhattuparamo’’ti (pu. pa. 31).
那么,究竟是谁决定了他们这样的分类呢?有些人先说:“是由前因决定的。”有些人说:“是由初道决定的。”有些人说:“是由上面三道决定的。”又有些人说:“是由三道的观决定的。”在这些说法中,若依“前因决定”之说,则意味着初道的亲依止已经被造作,由此会导致上面三道在没有亲依止的情况下也能生起。若依“初道决定”之说,则会使上面三道变得毫无作用。若依“上面三道决定”之说,便会招致“初道尚未生起时,上面三道便已生起”的过失。因此,“由观决定”这一说法才是合理的。因为,若后三道的观力强猛,便称为“一种子者”;较此观力更弱一些的,称为“家家者”;再更弱的,便是“极七次者”。在这里,无论是只在天界流转七次即证阿拉汉果的,还是只在人间流转七次即证阿拉汉果的,都不是此处所说的“极七次者”。只有那种时而投生天界、时而投生人间,以天人混杂的方式流转恰恰七次才证得阿拉汉果的人,才是此处所指。因此,“极七次者”这个名称在这里应当理解为……显示巴利原文
Ko pana tesaṃ etaṃ pabhedaṃ niyametīti? Keci tāva ‘‘pubbahetu niyametī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘paṭhamamaggo’’, keci ‘‘upari tayo maggā’’. Keci ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā’’ti. Tattha pubbahetu niyametīti vāde paṭhamamaggassa upanissayo kato nāma hoti. Upari tayo maggā nirupanissayā uppannāti āpajjati. Paṭhamamaggo niyametīti vāde upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ niratthakatā āpajjati. Upari tayo maggā niyamentīti vāde ‘‘paṭhamamagge anuppanne eva upari tayo maggā uppannā’’ti āpajjati. Vipassanā niyametīti vādo pana yujjati. Sace hi upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā balavatī hoti, ekabījī nāma hoti. Tato mandatarā kolaṃkolo. Tato mandatarā sattakkhattuparamoti. Ettha ca yo manussesu eva sattakkhattuṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, yo ca devesuyeva sattakkhattuṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ime na idhādhippetā. Yo pana kālena devesu, kālena manussesūti vomissakanayena saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, so idhādhippeto. Tasmā ‘‘sattakkhattuparamo’’ti idaṃ idhaṭṭhakavokiṇṇavaṭṭajjhāsayassa vasena veditabbaṃ. Vaṭṭajjhāsayo hi ādito paṭṭhāya cha devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhe ṭhatvā parinibbāyissati.
其中,有人以信为主导而生起入流道,在那一刻道心刹那称为“随信行”;而在果心刹那,则成为“信解脱者”,并按前面所说的方式,分入“一种子者”等类别。又有人以慧为主导而生起入流道,在道心刹那称为“随法行”;在果心刹那,则成为“见至者”,同样分入“一种子者”等类别。这是针对未获得八解脱者而言的。至于已得八解脱者,在果心刹那则称为“身证者”。在这里,这些名为信解脱者、见至者与身证者的三种入流者,都被摄入一种子者等三类之中,于是说道:“应以五种补特伽罗来说明——即一种子者……乃至……随法行者。”如此,便以五种补特伽罗来作说明。显示巴利原文
Tattha yo saddhaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sotāpattimaggaṃ nibbatteti, so maggakkhaṇe saddhānusārī nāma hoti. Phalakkhaṇe pana saddhāvimutto nāma hutvā vuttanayena ekabījiādibhedo hoti. Yo pana paññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sotāpattimaggaṃ nibbatteti, so maggakkhaṇe dhammānusārī nāma. Phalakkhaṇe pana diṭṭhippatto nāma hutvā ekabījiādibhedo hoti. Idañca aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ alābhino vasena vuttaṃ. Lābhī pana phalakkhaṇe kāyasakkhī nāma hoti. Tattha ye saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattakāyasakkhināmakā tayo sotāpannā, te ekabījiādīhi tīheva saṅgahetvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘pañcahi puggalehi niddisitabbaṃ ekabījinā…pe… dhammānusārinā’’ti, evaṃ pañcahi.
“以十二种补特伽罗”是说:一来道位者、一来者、不来道位者,以及不作细分的阿那含,再将阿那含细分为中般涅槃者等五种,加上信解脱者、见至者、身证者三种,如是共为十二种补特伽罗。其中,在无烦天等处,尚未活到该处天界寿命的一半便般涅槃者,名为“中般涅槃者”。而活过寿命的一半之后才证得阿拉汉果者,名为“生般涅槃者”。同样地,投生至无烦天等处后,不加功用、不作特别努力便证得阿拉汉果者,名为“无行般涅槃者”。需加功用行、作特别努力才证得阿拉汉果者,名为“有行般涅槃者”。具有向上、一再向上直至梵天界的再生之流,故称“上流者”。从结生心的角度说,他将去往色究竟天,故称“去色究竟者”。显示巴利原文
Dvādasahipuggalehīti sakadāgāmimaggaṭṭho, sakadāgāmī, anāgāmimaggaṭṭho, abhedena anāgāmī, antarāparinibbāyiādayo pañca, saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattakāyasakkhino tayoti bhedena aṭṭhāti, evaṃ dvādasahi. Tattha hi yo avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ appatvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ antarāparinibbāyī. Yo pana āyuvemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ upahaccaparinibbāyī. Tathā yo avihādīsu upapanno asaṅkhārena appayogena arahattaṃ adhigacchati, ayaṃ asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Yo pana sasaṅkhārena sappayogena arahattaṃ adhigacchati, ayaṃ sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Uddhaṃ uparūpari brahmaloke upapattisoto etassāti uddhaṃsoto. Paṭisandhivasena akaniṭṭhe gacchatīti akaniṭṭhagāmī.
在此,有“上流且去色究竟者”,有“上流但不去色究竟者”,有“非上流而去色究竟者”,有“非上流也不去色究竟者”。其中,若有人在此处证得不来果,投生于无烦天等处,于彼处住满寿量后,又投生更上层的天界,如此层层向上最终到达色究竟天,此人即名为“上流且去色究竟者”。若投生在无烦天等处后,并未于彼处般涅槃,也未到达色究竟天,而是在更上的梵天界中般涅槃,此人即名为“上流但不去色究竟者”。若从此处死后,唯直接投生至色究竟天,此人即名为“非上流而去色究竟者”。若在无烦天等四天中的任何一处投生后,便在那里般涅槃,此人即名为“非上流也不去色究竟者”。至于信解脱者等的分类,则如前说。显示巴利原文
Tattha atthi uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī atthi uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī, atthi na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī atthi na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmīti. Tattha yo idha anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā avihādīsu nibbatto tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā uparūpari nibbattitvā akaniṭṭhaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu nibbatto tattheva aparinibbāyitvā akaniṭṭhampi appatvā uparūpari brahmaloke parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo ito cavitvā akaniṭṭheyeva nibbattati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu catūsu aññatarasmiṃ nibbattitvā tattheva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Saddhāvimuttādayo vuttavibhāgāyeva.
关于“以九种补特伽罗”:在此,未获得八解脱的阿拉汉,称为“慧解脱”。获得八解脱的阿拉汉,由镇伏断与正断两种解脱,从所谓色身与名身两个方面获得解脱故,称为“俱分解脱”。关于“等首者”,有三种:威仪等首者、病等首者、寿等首者。显示巴利原文
Navahi puggalehīti ettha aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ alābhī arahā paññāvimutto nāma. Tesaṃ pana lābhī vikkhambhanasamucchedavimokkhavasena ubhohi bhāgehi rūpakāyanāmakāyasaṅkhātato ubhato bhāgato vimuttattā ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma. Samasīsināti ettha tividho samasīsī – iriyāpathasamasīsī, rogasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsīti.
其中,所谓“威仪等首者”,是指这样的修行者:无论他以站立、端坐等何种威仪安住并开始修观,便即在那种威仪中证得阿拉汉果,随后便般涅槃。而“病等首者”是指:他遭遇了某种疾病,在病中即开始修观,证得阿拉汉果后,便因病而般涅槃。所谓的“首”有多种:障碍之首为渴爱,束缚之首为我慢,执取之首为邪见,散乱之首为掉举,烦恼之首为无明,胜解之首为信,策励之首为精进,安立之首为念,无散乱之首为定,见之首为慧,运转之首为命根,行境之首为解脱,行之首为灭。在这十三种首之中,阿拉汉道彻底断尽烦恼之首(即无明),死亡心则彻底断尽运转之首(即命根)。其中,断尽无明的心并不能断尽命根,断尽命根的心也不能断尽无明。断尽无明的是某一种心,断尽命根的是另一种不同的心。若对某一位修行者而言,此二首同时被断尽,那么此人便称为“寿等首者”。显示巴利原文
Tatra yo ṭhānādīsu iriyāpathesu yeneva iriyāpathena samannāgato hutvā vipassanaṃ ārabhati, teneva iriyāpathena arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ iriyāpathasamasīsī nāma. Yo pana ekaṃ rogaṃ patvā antoroge eva vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā teneva rogena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ rogasamasīsī nāma. Palibodhasīsaṃ taṇhā, bandhanasīsaṃ māno, parāmāsasīsaṃ diṭṭhi, vikkhepasīsaṃ uddhaccaṃ, kilesasīsaṃ avijjā, adhimokkhasīsaṃ saddhā, paggahasīsaṃ vīriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānasīsaṃ sati, avikkhepasīsaṃ samādhi, dassanasīsaṃ paññā, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ, gocarasīsaṃ vimokkho, saṅkhārasīsaṃ nirodhoti terasasu sīsesu kilesasīsaṃ avijjaṃ arahattamaggo pariyādiyati, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyati. Tattha avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ avijjaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Aññaṃ avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ, aññaṃ jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ. Yassa cetaṃ sīsadvayaṃ samaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, so jīvitasamasīsī nāma.
为何说此为“同时”呢?因为心识刹那恰好等齐的缘故。即于道出起的那个心识刹那,入流道后有五种省察,一来道后亦有五种省察,不来道后亦有五种省察,阿拉汉道后则有四种省察——就在安住于这第十九种省察智之后,他沉入有分心而般涅槃。正是由于心识刹那的这种等齐,此二首的同时断尽才称为“同时”。因此,这样的补特伽罗便被称为“寿等首者”,这正是此处所指的含义。如此,空解脱者等三种,加上信解脱者、慧解脱者、俱分解脱者、等首者,这七种声闻阿拉汉,以及独觉佛、正自觉者——应以此九种补特伽罗来解释属于无学分位的经典。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ panidaṃ samaṃ hotīti? Vārasamatāya. Yasmiñhi vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sotāpattimagge pañca paccavekkhaṇāni, sakadāgāmimagge pañca, anāgāmimagge pañca, arahattamagge cattārīti ekūnavīsatime paccavekkhaṇañāṇe patiṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā parinibbāyato imāya vārasamatāya idaṃ ubhayasīsapariyādānampi samaṃ hoti nāma. Tenāyaṃ puggalo ‘‘jīvitasamasīsī’’ti vuccati, ayameva idhādhippeto. Evaṃ suññatavimuttādayo tayo saddhāvimutto paññāvimutto ubhatobhāgavimutto samasīsīti satta sāvakā arahanto, paccekabuddho, sammāsambuddhoti imehi navahi puggalehi asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ.
“贪行者”:拥有与贪俱行之行的人,即是贪行者。或者说,被贪所驱使、所推动而行的人,便是贪行者,其意为内心倾向于贪、以贪为增上者。这一解释方法同样适用于其余几种。“住于贪面前”:即处于贪的缠缚状态之中,意思是当下正被贪所缠缚。对其余的语句,也采用同样的理解方式。显示巴利原文
Rāgacaritoti rāgasahitaṃ caritaṃ etassāti rāgacarito. Rāgena vā carito pavattito rāgacarito, rāgajjhāsayo rāgādhikoti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Rāgamukhe ṭhitoti rāgapariyuṭṭhāne ṭhito, pariyuṭṭhitarāgoti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
所谓“习气部分”的经典,是指以世间和众生为所依的习气部分经典。因为,以世间和众生为所依的杂染部分经典,是由贪行人等所阐明的。在这里,正是承接了“世间”与“众生所依”这两个词之后,才说“习气部分”的。“以持戒者”,即指具戒者等人。而“自然戒”等,是指那些成就了这些法的人。通过举出他们,是为了标示这类人。或者也可以说,为了显示法所依应当从自然戒等来理解,而众生所依应当从自然具戒者等来理解,因此先说了“应以持戒者来说明”,然后才说“自然戒”等。此处举出自然戒等五种,只是一个示例,因为这里还可以包含如布施、随喜、听法、说法、见正直业等。又或者说,正是为了将这些法也统摄进来并加以显示,才说了“五种”。显示巴利原文
Vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti lokiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ. Lokiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañhi suttaṃ rāgacaritehi puggalehi niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘lokiyaṃ, sattādhiṭṭhāna’’nti padadvayaṃ anuvattamānaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vāsanābhāgiya’’nti. Sīlavantehīti sīlavantādīhi puggalehi. Pakatisīlantiādi yehi samannāgatā, te puggalā. Tesaṃ dassanena puggalānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ. Atha vā dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pakatisīlādivasena, sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ pakatisīlavantādivasena veditabbanti imassa nayassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sīlavantehi niddisitabba’’nti vatvā ‘‘pakatisīla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ pakatisīlādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ eva gahaṇaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, pattidānaabbhanumodanadhammassavanadesanādiṭṭhijukammādīnampi cettha sambhavato. Tesampi vā ettheva saṅgahetvā dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pañcā’’ti vuttaṃ.
其中,自然戒是指具足远离的戒。心净信是指对业果的信心和对三宝的信心。“应以智来说明智”:凡是经典中出现“慧”这个词的经典,都应当以“智”来说明。不要以为只有用“慧”这个同义词才称为智,为了显示凡是以“慧根”等异名出现“慧”的经典,也都应当以“智”来说明,所以才说了“慧根”等。它的含义就如前面所解释的。而“或者,凡是还有其他的”等文句,意思是:或者,凡是还有其他任何称得上“慧”的名称,只要它出现在某部经典中,那部经典就应当以“智”来说明——这就是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Tattha pakatisīlanti sampattaviratisīlaṃ. Cittappasādoti kammaphalasaddhā ratanattayasaddhā ca. Ñāṇaṃ paññāya niddisitabbanti yasmiṃ sutte paññā āgatā, taṃ suttaṃ ñāṇanti niddisitabbaṃ. Na kevalaṃ paññāpariyāyeneva, atha kho paññindriyādipariyāyenapi yattha paññā āgatā, taṃ suttaṃ ñāṇanti niddisitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘paññindriyenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – heṭṭhā vutto eva. Yaṃ vā panātiādīsu yaṃ vā aññaṃ kiñci paññāya adhivacanaṃ. Sabbaṃ taṃ yattha katthaci sutte āgataṃ, taṃ suttaṃ ñāṇanti niddisitabbanti attho.
“以内外处”:即在哪部经中出现了内处与外处,那部经就应当依那些处而说明为“智”与“所知”。即使是作为所缘的慧,它本身也是“所知”,因为这里是把慧当作所知而单独提出的。事实上,正如“慧是其他智的所缘”,所以在某些经中,慧也是以所知的身份被宣说的。“凡是作为所缘的”,是指凡是成为智之对象的色等诸法。“内或外”中的“或”字,还包含了粗、细等分类。“所有这一切,以有为与无为”的意思是:所有这一切,依其可能的情况,以有为的性质和无为的性质,都应当被说明为“所知”。因为,正是依据所知法的缘故,所知经才被称为“所知”。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattikabāhirehīti yasmiṃ sutte ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, bāhirāni ca āyatanāni āgatāni, taṃ suttaṃ tehi āyatanehi ñāṇaṃ ñeyyanti niddisitabbaṃ. Paññāpi ārammaṇabhūtā ñeyyanti ñeyyato visuṃ katvā paññā vuttā. Tathā hi paññā ñāṇantarassa ārammaṇanti katthaci sutte ñeyyabhāvenapi vuccati. Yaṃ kiñci ārammaṇabhūtanti yaṃ kiñci ñāṇassa visayabhūtaṃ rūpādi. Ajjhattikaṃ vā bāhiraṃ vāti vā-saddena oḷārikādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabbaṃ taṃ saṅkhatena asaṅkhatena cāti sabbaṃ taṃ yathāsambhavaṃ saṅkhatabhāvena asaṅkhatabhāvena ca ñeyyanti niddisitabbaṃ. Ñeyyadhammavasena hi ñeyyasuttaṃ ñeyyanti vuccatīti.
“凡是世尊宣说的任何一类言说”:这是指在世间、出世间等经典中,一部经可能兼具两种性质。其中,凡是世尊以某一种特定方式独自宣说、阐明的言说,“所有这一切,都应依所说明的那样去持守”,意思是:那一切经典,无论是在世间等类别中属于单一的情形,还是兼具两种面向的情形,都应按照经典中所说明、所分别的方式去把握、去理解;也就是应以相应的重点予以说明。这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ vā pana kiñci bhagavā aññataravacanaṃ bhāsatīti lokiyalokuttarādisuttesu ekasmiṃ sutte dve. Tesu yaṃ vā pana kiñci aññataravacanaṃ ekasseva kathanaṃ bhāsati niddisati. Sabbaṃ taṃ yathāniddiṭṭhaṃ dhārayitabbanti taṃ yathā sabbaṃ suttaṃ lokiyādīsu yadi aññataravasena, atha ubhayavasena yathā yathā niddiṭṭhaṃ, tathā tathā gahetabbaṃ, taṃ taṃ padhānabhāvena niddisitabbanti attho.
只有与烦恼俱起的业,才是感召果报的因,其余的业则不是,所以经典中说:“因有两种,即业与烦恼”。此处的“集”是指烦恼,这是以“集”一词来指代属于集谛的那部分法。“烦恼”则是指具有烦恼的,即被染污的意思。“所见”:凡是所见的。“于诸地中”:是指在凡夫地等各个阶段。“以适法与适法随顺”:即通过适法和适法随顺来说明。其中,适法是圣典中直接从法本身来宣说的;适法随顺则是通过“四大教法”的方式,从理则上显示出来的。“以被禁止的原因”:是指世尊由于什么原因而禁止某事物,就应以那个原因来说明它。因为世尊所绝对遮止的,正是那些会导向贪等烦恼的法,所以应当以“这会引生贪”等原因予以说明。“法的”是指无为法。“圣法的”是指道果之法。其余的文句便容易理解了。显示巴利原文
Kilesasahitaññeva kammaṃ vipākassa hetu, na itaranti vuttaṃ ‘‘duvidho hetu yañca kammaṃ ye ca kilesā’’ti. Samudayo kilesāti ettha ‘‘samudayo’’ti etena samudayapakkhiyā vuttā. ‘‘Kilesā’’ti ca kilesavanto, saṃkiliṭṭhāti attho. Yaṃ dissatīti yaṃ yaṃ dissati. Tāsu tāsu bhūmīsūti puthujjanabhūmiādīsu. Kappiyānulomenāti kappiyena ca kappiyānulomena ca. Tattha kappiyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato vuttaṃ, kappiyānulomaṃ mahāpadesavasena nayato dassitaṃ. Paṭikkhittakāraṇenāti yena kāraṇena bhagavatā yaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, tena kāraṇena taṃ niddisitabbaṃ. Ekantena sarāgādisaṃvattanameva hi bhagavatā paṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ sarāgāya saṃvattanādikāraṇena niddisitabbaṃ . Dhammassāti asaṅkhatadhammassa. Ariyadhammānanti maggaphaladhammānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在这里,正如杂染分等由于彼此相互关联,而有多种多样的论母分类被认可一样,由于世间、众生所依等彼此相互关联,同样可能产生多种多样的论母分类。然而在圣典中,这两个方面都只是通过显示一部分的方式来呈现,因此应当知道,这仅仅是示现一种理路。因为有智慧的人,是能够循着这个理路,将那些论母都决择出来的。而且,正如杂染分等与世间等各自分开,依彼此关联的类别而有这些多种多样的论母分类,这两大类之间依其关联,随宜运用这一理路同样也可以获得。例如,世间经典中有些属于杂染分,有些属于习气分;同样地,出世间经典中有些是抉择分,有些是无学分位。其余的皆可依此类推。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yathā saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggato anekavidho paṭṭhānabhedo icchito, evaṃ lokiyasattādhiṭṭhānādisaṃsaggatopi anekavidho paṭṭhānabhedo sambhavati. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ubhayatthāpi ekadesadassanavasena āgatattā nayadassananti veditabbaṃ. Sakkā hi iminā nayena viññunā te niddhāretunti. Yathā ca saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ lokiyādīnañca visuṃ visuṃ saṃsaggabhedavasena ayaṃ paṭṭhānabhedo anekavidho labbhati, evaṃ ubhayesampi saṃsaggavasena ayaṃ nayo yathārahaṃ labbhateva. Labbhati hi lokiyaṃ suttaṃ kiñci saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ, kiñci vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Tathā lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ kiñci nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, kiñci asekkhabhāgiyanti. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
如此,将二十八种论母摄入十六种论母,又将十六种论母摄入二十八种论母,再依二法、三法等分类,随其所应可能成立的种种论母分别,皆应如此理解。而且,这以三藏中所能获得的经文词句为准。然而,若逐一引用那些经文词句为例证来详尽阐明此义,便会过于冗长,也会使《导论》的注释变得过于繁重;而有智慧的人循此理路即能通达其义,故不再详加展开。也正因为如此,圣典中只通过显示它们部分相互结合的样式来呈现论母的分别,并未毫无遗漏地全部显示。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ soḷasavidhe paṭṭhāne aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ pakkhipitvā, aṭṭhavīsatividhe ca paṭṭhāne soḷasavidhaṃ pakkhipitvā yathārahaṃ dukatikādibhedena sambhavato paṭṭhānavibhāgo veditabbo, so ca kho tīsu piṭakesu labbhamānassa suttapadassa vasena. Yasmā pana tāni tāni suttapadāni udāharaṇavasena niddhāretvā imasmiṃ atthe vitthāriyamāne atipapañco hoti, atibhāriyā ca nettisaṃvaṇṇanā, sakkā ca iminā nayena viññunā ayamattho viññātuṃ, tasmā na taṃ vitthārayimha. Teneva hi pāḷiyaṃ aññamaññasaṃsaggavasena paṭṭhānavibhāgo ekadeseneva dassito, na nippadesatoti.
于句义、理则与论母中,作极清净之抉择;
这是对九分教及其教法的义释。
这部《导论》,甚深而精微,为智者所宣说,
由具足自在的大迦旃延大长老所开示。
在那名为龙城的港口,即正法入处,
我住于法阿育大王寺。
如此,我今编纂此论,所获功德,
愿以此功德力,令世间怙主之教法久住。
已契入清净的戒等行道,
愿一切众生皆得品尝解脱之味。
显示巴利原文 Hāre naye ca paṭṭhāne, suvisuddhavinicchayaṃ; Vibhajanto navaṅgassa, sāsanassatthavaṇṇanaṃ. Nettippakaraṇaṃ dhīro, gambhīraṃ nipuṇañca yaṃ; Adesayi mahāthero, mahākaccāyano vasī. Saddhammāvataraṭṭhāne, paṭṭane nāgasavhaye; Dhammāsokamahārāja-vihāre vasatā mayā. Ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ yā tassa, āraddhā atthavaṇṇanā; Udāharaṇasuttānaṃ, lakkhaṇānañca sabbaso. Atthaṃ pakāsayantī sā, anākulavinicchayā; Samattā sattavīsāya, pāḷiyā bhāṇavārato. Iti taṃ saṅkharontena, yaṃ taṃ adhigataṃ mayā; Puññaṃ tassānubhāvena, lokanāthassa sāsanaṃ. Ogāhetvā visuddhāya, sīlādipaṭipattiyā; Sabbepi dehino hontu, vimuttirasabhāgino. Ciraṃ tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, sammāsambuddhasāsanaṃ; Tasmiṃ sagāravā niccaṃ, hontu sabbepi pāṇino. Sammā vassatu kālena, devopi jagatīpati; Saddhammanirato lokaṃ, dhammeneva pasāsatūti.